* config/alpha/alpha.c, config/arc/arc.c,
[official-gcc.git] / gcc / config / sparc / sparc.c
blob958cbc20e2d03969c2759250b29b6ea713cc81b9
1 /* Subroutines for insn-output.c for SPARC.
2 Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
3 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 Contributed by Michael Tiemann (tiemann@cygnus.com)
5 64-bit SPARC-V9 support by Michael Tiemann, Jim Wilson, and Doug Evans,
6 at Cygnus Support.
8 This file is part of GCC.
10 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
12 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
13 any later version.
15 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
16 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
17 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
18 GNU General Public License for more details.
20 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
21 along with GCC; see the file COPYING. If not, write to
22 the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
23 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */
25 #include "config.h"
26 #include "system.h"
27 #include "coretypes.h"
28 #include "tm.h"
29 #include "tree.h"
30 #include "rtl.h"
31 #include "regs.h"
32 #include "hard-reg-set.h"
33 #include "real.h"
34 #include "insn-config.h"
35 #include "conditions.h"
36 #include "output.h"
37 #include "insn-attr.h"
38 #include "flags.h"
39 #include "function.h"
40 #include "expr.h"
41 #include "optabs.h"
42 #include "recog.h"
43 #include "toplev.h"
44 #include "ggc.h"
45 #include "tm_p.h"
46 #include "debug.h"
47 #include "target.h"
48 #include "target-def.h"
49 #include "cfglayout.h"
51 /* 1 if the caller has placed an "unimp" insn immediately after the call.
52 This is used in v8 code when calling a function that returns a structure.
53 v9 doesn't have this. Be careful to have this test be the same as that
54 used on the call. */
56 #define SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P \
57 (!TARGET_ARCH64 && current_function_returns_struct \
58 && ! integer_zerop (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl))) \
59 && (TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl))) \
60 == INTEGER_CST))
62 /* Global variables for machine-dependent things. */
64 /* Size of frame. Need to know this to emit return insns from leaf procedures.
65 ACTUAL_FSIZE is set by compute_frame_size() which is called during the
66 reload pass. This is important as the value is later used in insn
67 scheduling (to see what can go in a delay slot).
68 APPARENT_FSIZE is the size of the stack less the register save area and less
69 the outgoing argument area. It is used when saving call preserved regs. */
70 static HOST_WIDE_INT apparent_fsize;
71 static HOST_WIDE_INT actual_fsize;
73 /* Number of live general or floating point registers needed to be
74 saved (as 4-byte quantities). */
75 static int num_gfregs;
77 /* Save the operands last given to a compare for use when we
78 generate a scc or bcc insn. */
79 rtx sparc_compare_op0, sparc_compare_op1;
81 /* Coordinate with the md file wrt special insns created by
82 sparc_function_epilogue. */
83 bool sparc_emitting_epilogue;
85 /* Vector to say how input registers are mapped to output registers.
86 HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM cannot be remapped by this function to
87 eliminate it. You must use -fomit-frame-pointer to get that. */
88 char leaf_reg_remap[] =
89 { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
90 -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, 14, -1,
91 -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1,
92 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, -1, 15,
94 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
95 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47,
96 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55,
97 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63,
98 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71,
99 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79,
100 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87,
101 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95,
102 96, 97, 98, 99, 100};
104 /* Vector, indexed by hard register number, which contains 1
105 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
106 function treatment. */
107 char sparc_leaf_regs[] =
108 { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
109 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0,
110 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
111 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1,
112 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
113 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
114 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
115 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
116 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
117 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
118 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
119 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
120 1, 1, 1, 1, 1};
122 struct machine_function GTY(())
124 /* Some local-dynamic TLS symbol name. */
125 const char *some_ld_name;
128 /* Name of where we pretend to think the frame pointer points.
129 Normally, this is "%fp", but if we are in a leaf procedure,
130 this is "%sp+something". We record "something" separately as it may be
131 too big for reg+constant addressing. */
133 static const char *frame_base_name;
134 static HOST_WIDE_INT frame_base_offset;
136 static void sparc_init_modes (void);
137 static int save_regs (FILE *, int, int, const char *, int, int, HOST_WIDE_INT);
138 static int restore_regs (FILE *, int, int, const char *, int, int);
139 static void build_big_number (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT, const char *);
140 static void scan_record_type (tree, int *, int *, int *);
141 static int function_arg_slotno (const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *, enum machine_mode,
142 tree, int, int, int *, int *);
144 static int supersparc_adjust_cost (rtx, rtx, rtx, int);
145 static int hypersparc_adjust_cost (rtx, rtx, rtx, int);
147 static void sparc_output_addr_vec (rtx);
148 static void sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (rtx);
149 static void sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors (void);
150 static int check_return_regs (rtx);
151 static rtx sparc_builtin_saveregs (void);
152 static int epilogue_renumber (rtx *, int);
153 static bool sparc_assemble_integer (rtx, unsigned int, int);
154 static int set_extends (rtx);
155 static void output_restore_regs (FILE *, int);
156 static void sparc_output_function_prologue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT);
157 static void sparc_output_function_epilogue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT);
158 static void sparc_function_epilogue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT, int);
159 static void sparc_function_prologue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT, int);
160 #ifdef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
161 static void sparc_elf_asm_named_section (const char *, unsigned int);
162 #endif
163 static void sparc_aout_select_section (tree, int, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
164 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
165 static void sparc_aout_select_rtx_section (enum machine_mode, rtx,
166 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
167 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
169 static int sparc_adjust_cost (rtx, rtx, rtx, int);
170 static int sparc_issue_rate (void);
171 static void sparc_sched_init (FILE *, int, int);
172 static int sparc_use_dfa_pipeline_interface (void);
173 static int sparc_use_sched_lookahead (void);
175 static void emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (const char *, int, rtx *);
176 static void emit_soft_tfmode_binop (enum rtx_code, rtx *);
177 static void emit_soft_tfmode_unop (enum rtx_code, rtx *);
178 static void emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (enum rtx_code, rtx *);
179 static void emit_hard_tfmode_operation (enum rtx_code, rtx *);
181 static bool sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall (tree, tree);
182 static void sparc_init_libfuncs (void);
183 static void sparc_output_mi_thunk (FILE *, tree, HOST_WIDE_INT,
184 HOST_WIDE_INT, tree);
185 static struct machine_function * sparc_init_machine_status (void);
186 static bool sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (rtx);
187 static rtx sparc_tls_get_addr (void);
188 static rtx sparc_tls_got (void);
189 static const char *get_some_local_dynamic_name (void);
190 static int get_some_local_dynamic_name_1 (rtx *, void *);
191 static bool sparc_rtx_costs (rtx, int, int, int *);
192 static bool sparc_promote_prototypes (tree);
193 static rtx sparc_struct_value_rtx (tree, int);
194 static bool sparc_return_in_memory (tree, tree);
195 static bool sparc_strict_argument_naming (CUMULATIVE_ARGS *);
197 /* Option handling. */
199 /* Code model option as passed by user. */
200 const char *sparc_cmodel_string;
201 /* Parsed value. */
202 enum cmodel sparc_cmodel;
204 char sparc_hard_reg_printed[8];
206 struct sparc_cpu_select sparc_select[] =
208 /* switch name, tune arch */
209 { (char *)0, "default", 1, 1 },
210 { (char *)0, "-mcpu=", 1, 1 },
211 { (char *)0, "-mtune=", 1, 0 },
212 { 0, 0, 0, 0 }
215 /* CPU type. This is set from TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT and -m{cpu,tune}=xxx. */
216 enum processor_type sparc_cpu;
218 /* Initialize the GCC target structure. */
220 /* The sparc default is to use .half rather than .short for aligned
221 HI objects. Use .word instead of .long on non-ELF systems. */
222 #undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP
223 #define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.half\t"
224 #ifndef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
225 #undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_SI_OP
226 #define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_SI_OP "\t.word\t"
227 #endif
229 #undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP
230 #define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.uahalf\t"
231 #undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP
232 #define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP "\t.uaword\t"
233 #undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP
234 #define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP "\t.uaxword\t"
236 /* The target hook has to handle DI-mode values. */
237 #undef TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
238 #define TARGET_ASM_INTEGER sparc_assemble_integer
240 #undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
241 #define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE sparc_output_function_prologue
242 #undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
243 #define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE sparc_output_function_epilogue
245 #undef TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
246 #define TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST sparc_adjust_cost
247 #undef TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
248 #define TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE sparc_issue_rate
249 #undef TARGET_SCHED_INIT
250 #define TARGET_SCHED_INIT sparc_sched_init
251 #undef TARGET_SCHED_USE_DFA_PIPELINE_INTERFACE
252 #define TARGET_SCHED_USE_DFA_PIPELINE_INTERFACE sparc_use_dfa_pipeline_interface
253 #undef TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
254 #define TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD sparc_use_sched_lookahead
256 #undef TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
257 #define TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall
259 #undef TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
260 #define TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS sparc_init_libfuncs
262 #ifdef HAVE_AS_TLS
263 #undef TARGET_HAVE_TLS
264 #define TARGET_HAVE_TLS true
265 #endif
266 #undef TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
267 #define TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM sparc_cannot_force_const_mem
269 #undef TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
270 #define TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK sparc_output_mi_thunk
271 #undef TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
272 #define TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK default_can_output_mi_thunk_no_vcall
274 #undef TARGET_RTX_COSTS
275 #define TARGET_RTX_COSTS sparc_rtx_costs
276 #undef TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
277 #define TARGET_ADDRESS_COST hook_int_rtx_0
279 /* Return TRUE if the promotion described by PROMOTE_MODE should also be done
280 for outgoing function arguments.
281 This is only needed for TARGET_ARCH64, but since PROMOTE_MODE is a no-op
282 for TARGET_ARCH32 this is ok. Otherwise we'd need to add a runtime test
283 for this value. */
284 #undef TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
285 #define TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS hook_bool_tree_true
287 /* Return TRUE if the promotion described by PROMOTE_MODE should also be done
288 for the return value of functions. If this macro is defined, FUNCTION_VALUE
289 must perform the same promotions done by PROMOTE_MODE.
290 This is only needed for TARGET_ARCH64, but since PROMOTE_MODE is a no-op
291 for TARGET_ARCH32 this is ok. Otherwise we'd need to add a runtime test
292 for this value. */
293 #undef TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
294 #define TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN hook_bool_tree_true
296 #undef TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
297 #define TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES sparc_promote_prototypes
299 #undef TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
300 #define TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX sparc_struct_value_rtx
301 #undef TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
302 #define TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY sparc_return_in_memory
304 #undef TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
305 #define TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS sparc_builtin_saveregs
306 #undef TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
307 #define TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING sparc_strict_argument_naming
309 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
311 /* Validate and override various options, and do some machine dependent
312 initialization. */
314 void
315 sparc_override_options (void)
317 static struct code_model {
318 const char *const name;
319 const int value;
320 } const cmodels[] = {
321 { "32", CM_32 },
322 { "medlow", CM_MEDLOW },
323 { "medmid", CM_MEDMID },
324 { "medany", CM_MEDANY },
325 { "embmedany", CM_EMBMEDANY },
326 { 0, 0 }
328 const struct code_model *cmodel;
329 /* Map TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT to value for -m{arch,tune}=. */
330 static struct cpu_default {
331 const int cpu;
332 const char *const name;
333 } const cpu_default[] = {
334 /* There must be one entry here for each TARGET_CPU value. */
335 { TARGET_CPU_sparc, "cypress" },
336 { TARGET_CPU_sparclet, "tsc701" },
337 { TARGET_CPU_sparclite, "f930" },
338 { TARGET_CPU_v8, "v8" },
339 { TARGET_CPU_hypersparc, "hypersparc" },
340 { TARGET_CPU_sparclite86x, "sparclite86x" },
341 { TARGET_CPU_supersparc, "supersparc" },
342 { TARGET_CPU_v9, "v9" },
343 { TARGET_CPU_ultrasparc, "ultrasparc" },
344 { TARGET_CPU_ultrasparc3, "ultrasparc3" },
345 { 0, 0 }
347 const struct cpu_default *def;
348 /* Table of values for -m{cpu,tune}=. */
349 static struct cpu_table {
350 const char *const name;
351 const enum processor_type processor;
352 const int disable;
353 const int enable;
354 } const cpu_table[] = {
355 { "v7", PROCESSOR_V7, MASK_ISA, 0 },
356 { "cypress", PROCESSOR_CYPRESS, MASK_ISA, 0 },
357 { "v8", PROCESSOR_V8, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 },
358 /* TI TMS390Z55 supersparc */
359 { "supersparc", PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 },
360 { "sparclite", PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE },
361 /* The Fujitsu MB86930 is the original sparclite chip, with no fpu.
362 The Fujitsu MB86934 is the recent sparclite chip, with an fpu. */
363 { "f930", PROCESSOR_F930, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU, MASK_SPARCLITE },
364 { "f934", PROCESSOR_F934, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE|MASK_FPU },
365 { "hypersparc", PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8|MASK_FPU },
366 { "sparclite86x", PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU,
367 MASK_SPARCLITE },
368 { "sparclet", PROCESSOR_SPARCLET, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET },
369 /* TEMIC sparclet */
370 { "tsc701", PROCESSOR_TSC701, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET },
371 { "v9", PROCESSOR_V9, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9 },
372 /* TI ultrasparc I, II, IIi */
373 { "ultrasparc", PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9
374 /* Although insns using %y are deprecated, it is a clear win on current
375 ultrasparcs. */
376 |MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS},
377 /* TI ultrasparc III */
378 /* ??? Check if %y issue still holds true in ultra3. */
379 { "ultrasparc3", PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9|MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS},
380 { 0, 0, 0, 0 }
382 const struct cpu_table *cpu;
383 const struct sparc_cpu_select *sel;
384 int fpu;
386 #ifndef SPARC_BI_ARCH
387 /* Check for unsupported architecture size. */
388 if (! TARGET_64BIT != DEFAULT_ARCH32_P)
389 error ("%s is not supported by this configuration",
390 DEFAULT_ARCH32_P ? "-m64" : "-m32");
391 #endif
393 /* We force all 64bit archs to use 128 bit long double */
394 if (TARGET_64BIT && ! TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_128)
396 error ("-mlong-double-64 not allowed with -m64");
397 target_flags |= MASK_LONG_DOUBLE_128;
400 /* Code model selection. */
401 sparc_cmodel = SPARC_DEFAULT_CMODEL;
403 #ifdef SPARC_BI_ARCH
404 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
405 sparc_cmodel = CM_32;
406 #endif
408 if (sparc_cmodel_string != NULL)
410 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
412 for (cmodel = &cmodels[0]; cmodel->name; cmodel++)
413 if (strcmp (sparc_cmodel_string, cmodel->name) == 0)
414 break;
415 if (cmodel->name == NULL)
416 error ("bad value (%s) for -mcmodel= switch", sparc_cmodel_string);
417 else
418 sparc_cmodel = cmodel->value;
420 else
421 error ("-mcmodel= is not supported on 32 bit systems");
424 fpu = TARGET_FPU; /* save current -mfpu status */
426 /* Set the default CPU. */
427 for (def = &cpu_default[0]; def->name; ++def)
428 if (def->cpu == TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT)
429 break;
430 if (! def->name)
431 abort ();
432 sparc_select[0].string = def->name;
434 for (sel = &sparc_select[0]; sel->name; ++sel)
436 if (sel->string)
438 for (cpu = &cpu_table[0]; cpu->name; ++cpu)
439 if (! strcmp (sel->string, cpu->name))
441 if (sel->set_tune_p)
442 sparc_cpu = cpu->processor;
444 if (sel->set_arch_p)
446 target_flags &= ~cpu->disable;
447 target_flags |= cpu->enable;
449 break;
452 if (! cpu->name)
453 error ("bad value (%s) for %s switch", sel->string, sel->name);
457 /* If -mfpu or -mno-fpu was explicitly used, don't override with
458 the processor default. Clear MASK_FPU_SET to avoid confusing
459 the reverse mapping from switch values to names. */
460 if (TARGET_FPU_SET)
462 target_flags = (target_flags & ~MASK_FPU) | fpu;
463 target_flags &= ~MASK_FPU_SET;
466 /* Don't allow -mvis if FPU is disabled. */
467 if (! TARGET_FPU)
468 target_flags &= ~MASK_VIS;
470 /* -mvis assumes UltraSPARC+, so we are sure v9 instructions
471 are available.
472 -m64 also implies v9. */
473 if (TARGET_VIS || TARGET_ARCH64)
475 target_flags |= MASK_V9;
476 target_flags &= ~(MASK_V8 | MASK_SPARCLET | MASK_SPARCLITE);
479 /* Use the deprecated v8 insns for sparc64 in 32 bit mode. */
480 if (TARGET_V9 && TARGET_ARCH32)
481 target_flags |= MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS;
483 /* V8PLUS requires V9, makes no sense in 64 bit mode. */
484 if (! TARGET_V9 || TARGET_ARCH64)
485 target_flags &= ~MASK_V8PLUS;
487 /* Don't use stack biasing in 32 bit mode. */
488 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
489 target_flags &= ~MASK_STACK_BIAS;
491 /* Supply a default value for align_functions. */
492 if (align_functions == 0
493 && (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
494 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3))
495 align_functions = 32;
497 /* Validate PCC_STRUCT_RETURN. */
498 if (flag_pcc_struct_return == DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN)
499 flag_pcc_struct_return = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? 0 : 1);
501 /* Only use .uaxword when compiling for a 64-bit target. */
502 if (!TARGET_ARCH64)
503 targetm.asm_out.unaligned_op.di = NULL;
505 /* Do various machine dependent initializations. */
506 sparc_init_modes ();
508 /* Set up function hooks. */
509 init_machine_status = sparc_init_machine_status;
512 /* Miscellaneous utilities. */
514 /* Nonzero if CODE, a comparison, is suitable for use in v9 conditional move
515 or branch on register contents instructions. */
518 v9_regcmp_p (enum rtx_code code)
520 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT
521 || code == LE || code == GT);
525 /* Operand constraints. */
527 /* Return nonzero only if OP is a register of mode MODE,
528 or const0_rtx. */
531 reg_or_0_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
533 if (register_operand (op, mode))
534 return 1;
535 if (op == const0_rtx)
536 return 1;
537 if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
538 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
539 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) == 0)
540 return 1;
541 if (fp_zero_operand (op, mode))
542 return 1;
543 return 0;
546 /* Return nonzero only if OP is const1_rtx. */
549 const1_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
551 return op == const1_rtx;
554 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point value with value 0.0. */
557 fp_zero_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
559 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op)) != MODE_FLOAT)
560 return 0;
561 return op == CONST0_RTX (mode);
564 /* Nonzero if OP is a register operand in floating point register. */
567 fp_register_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
569 if (! register_operand (op, mode))
570 return 0;
571 if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
572 op = SUBREG_REG (op);
573 return GET_CODE (op) == REG && SPARC_FP_REG_P (REGNO (op));
576 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
577 be loaded into an integer register using a single
578 sethi instruction. */
581 fp_sethi_p (rtx op)
583 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
585 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
586 long i;
588 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
589 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
590 ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
591 return 0;
592 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
593 if (SPARC_SETHI_P (i))
594 return 1;
597 return 0;
600 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
601 be loaded into an integer register using a single
602 mov instruction. */
605 fp_mov_p (rtx op)
607 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
609 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
610 long i;
612 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
613 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
614 ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
615 return 0;
616 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
617 if (SPARC_SIMM13_P (i))
618 return 1;
621 return 0;
624 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
625 be loaded into an integer register using a high/losum
626 instruction sequence. */
629 fp_high_losum_p (rtx op)
631 /* The constraints calling this should only be in
632 SFmode move insns, so any constant which cannot
633 be moved using a single insn will do. */
634 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
636 REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
637 long i;
639 REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
640 if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
641 ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
642 return 0;
643 REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
644 if (! SPARC_SETHI_P (i)
645 && ! SPARC_SIMM13_P (i))
646 return 1;
649 return 0;
652 /* Nonzero if OP is an integer register. */
655 intreg_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
657 return (register_operand (op, SImode)
658 || (TARGET_ARCH64 && register_operand (op, DImode)));
661 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point condition code register. */
664 fcc_reg_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
666 /* This can happen when recog is called from combine. Op may be a MEM.
667 Fail instead of calling abort in this case. */
668 if (GET_CODE (op) != REG)
669 return 0;
671 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
672 return 0;
673 if (mode == VOIDmode
674 && (GET_MODE (op) != CCFPmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCFPEmode))
675 return 0;
677 #if 0 /* ??? ==> 1 when %fcc0-3 are pseudos first. See gen_compare_reg(). */
678 if (reg_renumber == 0)
679 return REGNO (op) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER;
680 return REGNO_OK_FOR_CCFP_P (REGNO (op));
681 #else
682 return (unsigned) REGNO (op) - SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG < 4;
683 #endif
686 /* Nonzero if OP is a floating point condition code fcc0 register. */
689 fcc0_reg_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
691 /* This can happen when recog is called from combine. Op may be a MEM.
692 Fail instead of calling abort in this case. */
693 if (GET_CODE (op) != REG)
694 return 0;
696 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
697 return 0;
698 if (mode == VOIDmode
699 && (GET_MODE (op) != CCFPmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCFPEmode))
700 return 0;
702 return REGNO (op) == SPARC_FCC_REG;
705 /* Nonzero if OP is an integer or floating point condition code register. */
708 icc_or_fcc_reg_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
710 if (GET_CODE (op) == REG && REGNO (op) == SPARC_ICC_REG)
712 if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
713 return 0;
714 if (mode == VOIDmode
715 && GET_MODE (op) != CCmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCXmode)
716 return 0;
717 return 1;
720 return fcc_reg_operand (op, mode);
723 /* Nonzero if OP can appear as the dest of a RESTORE insn. */
725 restore_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
727 return (GET_CODE (op) == REG && GET_MODE (op) == mode
728 && (REGNO (op) < 8 || (REGNO (op) >= 24 && REGNO (op) < 32)));
731 /* Call insn on SPARC can take a PC-relative constant address, or any regular
732 memory address. */
735 call_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
737 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
738 abort ();
739 op = XEXP (op, 0);
740 return (symbolic_operand (op, mode) || memory_address_p (Pmode, op));
744 call_operand_address (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
746 return (symbolic_operand (op, mode) || memory_address_p (Pmode, op));
749 /* If OP is a SYMBOL_REF of a thread-local symbol, return its TLS mode,
750 otherwise return 0. */
753 tls_symbolic_operand (rtx op)
755 if (GET_CODE (op) != SYMBOL_REF)
756 return 0;
757 return SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (op);
761 tgd_symbolic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
763 return tls_symbolic_operand (op) == TLS_MODEL_GLOBAL_DYNAMIC;
767 tld_symbolic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
769 return tls_symbolic_operand (op) == TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC;
773 tie_symbolic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
775 return tls_symbolic_operand (op) == TLS_MODEL_INITIAL_EXEC;
779 tle_symbolic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
781 return tls_symbolic_operand (op) == TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_EXEC;
784 /* Returns 1 if OP is either a symbol reference or a sum of a symbol
785 reference and a constant. */
788 symbolic_operand (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
790 enum machine_mode omode = GET_MODE (op);
792 if (omode != mode && omode != VOIDmode && mode != VOIDmode)
793 return 0;
795 switch (GET_CODE (op))
797 case SYMBOL_REF:
798 return !SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (op);
800 case LABEL_REF:
801 return 1;
803 case CONST:
804 op = XEXP (op, 0);
805 return (((GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
806 && !SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (XEXP (op, 0)))
807 || GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == LABEL_REF)
808 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 1)) == CONST_INT);
810 default:
811 return 0;
815 /* Return truth value of statement that OP is a symbolic memory
816 operand of mode MODE. */
819 symbolic_memory_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
821 if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
822 op = SUBREG_REG (op);
823 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
824 return 0;
825 op = XEXP (op, 0);
826 return ((GET_CODE (op) == SYMBOL_REF && !SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (op))
827 || GET_CODE (op) == CONST || GET_CODE (op) == HIGH
828 || GET_CODE (op) == LABEL_REF);
831 /* Return truth value of statement that OP is a LABEL_REF of mode MODE. */
834 label_ref_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
836 if (GET_CODE (op) != LABEL_REF)
837 return 0;
838 if (GET_MODE (op) != mode)
839 return 0;
840 return 1;
843 /* Return 1 if the operand is an argument used in generating pic references
844 in either the medium/low or medium/anywhere code models of sparc64. */
847 sp64_medium_pic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
849 /* Check for (const (minus (symbol_ref:GOT)
850 (const (minus (label) (pc))))). */
851 if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST)
852 return 0;
853 op = XEXP (op, 0);
854 if (GET_CODE (op) != MINUS)
855 return 0;
856 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) != SYMBOL_REF)
857 return 0;
858 /* ??? Ensure symbol is GOT. */
859 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 1)) != CONST)
860 return 0;
861 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 1), 0)) != MINUS)
862 return 0;
863 return 1;
866 /* Return 1 if the operand is a data segment reference. This includes
867 the readonly data segment, or in other words anything but the text segment.
868 This is needed in the medium/anywhere code model on v9. These values
869 are accessed with EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG. */
872 data_segment_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
874 switch (GET_CODE (op))
876 case SYMBOL_REF :
877 return ! SYMBOL_REF_FUNCTION_P (op);
878 case PLUS :
879 /* Assume canonical format of symbol + constant.
880 Fall through. */
881 case CONST :
882 return data_segment_operand (XEXP (op, 0), VOIDmode);
883 default :
884 return 0;
888 /* Return 1 if the operand is a text segment reference.
889 This is needed in the medium/anywhere code model on v9. */
892 text_segment_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
894 switch (GET_CODE (op))
896 case LABEL_REF :
897 return 1;
898 case SYMBOL_REF :
899 return SYMBOL_REF_FUNCTION_P (op);
900 case PLUS :
901 /* Assume canonical format of symbol + constant.
902 Fall through. */
903 case CONST :
904 return text_segment_operand (XEXP (op, 0), VOIDmode);
905 default :
906 return 0;
910 /* Return 1 if the operand is either a register or a memory operand that is
911 not symbolic. */
914 reg_or_nonsymb_mem_operand (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
916 if (register_operand (op, mode))
917 return 1;
919 if (memory_operand (op, mode) && ! symbolic_memory_operand (op, mode))
920 return 1;
922 return 0;
926 splittable_symbolic_memory_operand (rtx op,
927 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
929 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
930 return 0;
931 if (! symbolic_operand (XEXP (op, 0), Pmode))
932 return 0;
933 return 1;
937 splittable_immediate_memory_operand (rtx op,
938 enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
940 if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
941 return 0;
942 if (! immediate_operand (XEXP (op, 0), Pmode))
943 return 0;
944 return 1;
947 /* Return truth value of whether OP is EQ or NE. */
950 eq_or_neq (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
952 return (GET_CODE (op) == EQ || GET_CODE (op) == NE);
955 /* Return 1 if this is a comparison operator, but not an EQ, NE, GEU,
956 or LTU for non-floating-point. We handle those specially. */
959 normal_comp_operator (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
961 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
963 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
964 return 0;
966 if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCFPmode
967 || GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCFPEmode)
968 return 1;
970 return (code != NE && code != EQ && code != GEU && code != LTU);
973 /* Return 1 if this is a comparison operator. This allows the use of
974 MATCH_OPERATOR to recognize all the branch insns. */
977 noov_compare_op (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
979 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
981 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
982 return 0;
984 if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CC_NOOVmode
985 || GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCX_NOOVmode)
986 /* These are the only branches which work with CC_NOOVmode. */
987 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT);
988 return 1;
991 /* Return 1 if this is a 64-bit comparison operator. This allows the use of
992 MATCH_OPERATOR to recognize all the branch insns. */
995 noov_compare64_op (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
997 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
999 if (! TARGET_V9)
1000 return 0;
1002 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
1003 return 0;
1005 if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCX_NOOVmode)
1006 /* These are the only branches which work with CCX_NOOVmode. */
1007 return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT);
1008 return (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCXmode);
1011 /* Nonzero if OP is a comparison operator suitable for use in v9
1012 conditional move or branch on register contents instructions. */
1015 v9_regcmp_op (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1017 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
1019 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
1020 return 0;
1022 return v9_regcmp_p (code);
1025 /* Return 1 if this is a SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND operation. */
1028 extend_op (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1030 return GET_CODE (op) == SIGN_EXTEND || GET_CODE (op) == ZERO_EXTEND;
1033 /* Return nonzero if OP is an operator of mode MODE which can set
1034 the condition codes explicitly. We do not include PLUS and MINUS
1035 because these require CC_NOOVmode, which we handle explicitly. */
1038 cc_arithop (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1040 if (GET_CODE (op) == AND
1041 || GET_CODE (op) == IOR
1042 || GET_CODE (op) == XOR)
1043 return 1;
1045 return 0;
1048 /* Return nonzero if OP is an operator of mode MODE which can bitwise
1049 complement its second operand and set the condition codes explicitly. */
1052 cc_arithopn (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1054 /* XOR is not here because combine canonicalizes (xor (not ...) ...)
1055 and (xor ... (not ...)) to (not (xor ...)). */
1056 return (GET_CODE (op) == AND
1057 || GET_CODE (op) == IOR);
1060 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
1061 signed 13 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable SImode operand for
1062 most 3 address instructions. */
1065 arith_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1067 if (register_operand (op, mode))
1068 return 1;
1069 if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST_INT)
1070 return 0;
1071 return SMALL_INT32 (op);
1074 /* Return true if OP is a constant 4096 */
1077 arith_4096_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1079 if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST_INT)
1080 return 0;
1081 else
1082 return INTVAL (op) == 4096;
1085 /* Return true if OP is suitable as second operand for add/sub */
1088 arith_add_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1090 return arith_operand (op, mode) || arith_4096_operand (op, mode);
1093 /* Return true if OP is a CONST_INT or a CONST_DOUBLE which can fit in the
1094 immediate field of OR and XOR instructions. Used for 64-bit
1095 constant formation patterns. */
1097 const64_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1099 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1100 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (INTVAL (op)))
1101 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != 64
1102 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1103 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))
1104 && (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) ==
1105 ((CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) != 0 ?
1106 (HOST_WIDE_INT)-1 : 0)))
1107 #endif
1111 /* The same, but only for sethi instructions. */
1113 const64_high_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1115 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1116 && (INTVAL (op) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff) != 0
1117 && SPARC_SETHI_P (INTVAL (op) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
1119 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1120 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1121 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff) != 0
1122 && SPARC_SETHI_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))));
1125 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
1126 signed 11 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable SImode operand for
1127 the movcc instructions. */
1130 arith11_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1132 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1133 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SPARC_SIMM11_P (INTVAL (op))));
1136 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
1137 signed 10 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable SImode operand for
1138 the movrcc instructions. */
1141 arith10_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1143 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1144 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SPARC_SIMM10_P (INTVAL (op))));
1147 /* Return true if OP is a register, is a CONST_INT that fits in a 13 bit
1148 immediate field, or is a CONST_DOUBLE whose both parts fit in a 13 bit
1149 immediate field.
1150 v9: Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
1151 can fit in a 13 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable DImode operand
1152 for most 3 address instructions. */
1155 arith_double_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1157 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1158 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op))
1159 || (! TARGET_ARCH64
1160 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1161 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000
1162 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000)
1163 || (TARGET_ARCH64
1164 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1165 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000
1166 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1167 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x1000) == 0x1000)
1168 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1169 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x1000) == 0))));
1172 /* Return true if OP is a constant 4096 for DImode on ARCH64 */
1175 arith_double_4096_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1177 return (TARGET_ARCH64 &&
1178 ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (op) == 4096) ||
1179 (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE &&
1180 CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) == 4096 &&
1181 CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0)));
1184 /* Return true if OP is suitable as second operand for add/sub in DImode */
1187 arith_double_add_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1189 return arith_double_operand (op, mode) || arith_double_4096_operand (op, mode);
1192 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
1193 can fit in an 11 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable DImode
1194 operand for the movcc instructions. */
1195 /* ??? Replace with arith11_operand? */
1198 arith11_double_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1200 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1201 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1202 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1203 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x400) < 0x800
1204 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1205 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x400) == 0x400)
1206 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1207 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x400) == 0)))
1208 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1209 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1210 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (INTVAL (op) + 0x400) < 0x800));
1213 /* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
1214 can fit in an 10 bit immediate field. This is an acceptable DImode
1215 operand for the movrcc instructions. */
1216 /* ??? Replace with arith10_operand? */
1219 arith10_double_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1221 return (register_operand (op, mode)
1222 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1223 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1224 && (unsigned) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x200) < 0x400
1225 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1226 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x200) == 0x200)
1227 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1228 && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x200) == 0)))
1229 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1230 && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
1231 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (INTVAL (op) + 0x200) < 0x400));
1234 /* Return truth value of whether OP is an integer which fits the
1235 range constraining immediate operands in most three-address insns,
1236 which have a 13 bit immediate field. */
1239 small_int (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1241 return (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op));
1245 small_int_or_double (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1247 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op))
1248 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1249 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1250 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))));
1253 /* Recognize operand values for the umul instruction. That instruction sign
1254 extends immediate values just like all other sparc instructions, but
1255 interprets the extended result as an unsigned number. */
1258 uns_small_int (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1260 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT > 32
1261 /* All allowed constants will fit a CONST_INT. */
1262 return (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1263 && ((INTVAL (op) >= 0 && INTVAL (op) < 0x1000)
1264 || (INTVAL (op) >= 0xFFFFF000
1265 && INTVAL (op) <= 0xFFFFFFFF)));
1266 #else
1267 return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && (unsigned) INTVAL (op) < 0x1000)
1268 || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1269 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1270 && (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) - 0xFFFFF000 < 0x1000));
1271 #endif
1275 uns_arith_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1277 return register_operand (op, mode) || uns_small_int (op, mode);
1280 /* Return truth value of statement that OP is a call-clobbered register. */
1282 clobbered_register (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1284 return (GET_CODE (op) == REG && call_used_regs[REGNO (op)]);
1287 /* Return 1 if OP is a valid operand for the source of a move insn. */
1290 input_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
1292 /* If both modes are non-void they must be the same. */
1293 if (mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE (op) != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
1294 return 0;
1296 /* Accept CONSTANT_P_RTX, since it will be gone by CSE1 and result in 0/1. */
1297 if (GET_CODE (op) == CONSTANT_P_RTX)
1298 return 1;
1300 /* Allow any one instruction integer constant, and all CONST_INT
1301 variants when we are working in DImode and !arch64. */
1302 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
1303 && ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
1304 && (SPARC_SETHI_P (INTVAL (op) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
1305 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (INTVAL (op))
1306 || (mode == DImode
1307 && ! TARGET_ARCH64)))
1308 || (TARGET_ARCH64
1309 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
1310 && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1311 && SPARC_SETHI_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op)))
1313 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1314 (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
1315 && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op)))
1316 #else
1317 (SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))
1318 && (((CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) == 0
1319 && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0)
1320 || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
1321 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) != 0))
1322 #endif
1323 ))))
1324 return 1;
1326 /* If !arch64 and this is a DImode const, allow it so that
1327 the splits can be generated. */
1328 if (! TARGET_ARCH64
1329 && mode == DImode
1330 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
1331 return 1;
1333 if (register_operand (op, mode))
1334 return 1;
1336 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
1337 && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
1338 return 1;
1340 /* If this is a SUBREG, look inside so that we handle
1341 paradoxical ones. */
1342 if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
1343 op = SUBREG_REG (op);
1345 /* Check for valid MEM forms. */
1346 if (GET_CODE (op) == MEM)
1348 rtx inside = XEXP (op, 0);
1350 if (GET_CODE (inside) == LO_SUM)
1352 /* We can't allow these because all of the splits
1353 (eventually as they trickle down into DFmode
1354 splits) require offsettable memory references. */
1355 if (! TARGET_V9
1356 && GET_MODE (op) == TFmode)
1357 return 0;
1359 return (register_operand (XEXP (inside, 0), Pmode)
1360 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (inside, 1)));
1362 return memory_address_p (mode, inside);
1365 return 0;
1369 /* We know it can't be done in one insn when we get here,
1370 the movsi expander guarantees this. */
1371 void
1372 sparc_emit_set_const32 (rtx op0, rtx op1)
1374 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
1375 rtx temp;
1377 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
1379 HOST_WIDE_INT value = INTVAL (op1);
1381 if (SPARC_SETHI_P (value & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
1382 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (value))
1383 abort ();
1386 /* Full 2-insn decomposition is needed. */
1387 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
1388 temp = op0;
1389 else
1390 temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
1392 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
1394 /* Emit them as real moves instead of a HIGH/LO_SUM,
1395 this way CSE can see everything and reuse intermediate
1396 values if it wants. */
1397 if (TARGET_ARCH64
1398 && HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != 64
1399 && (INTVAL (op1) & 0x80000000) != 0)
1400 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET
1401 (VOIDmode, temp,
1402 immed_double_const (INTVAL (op1) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff,
1403 0, DImode)));
1404 else
1405 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp,
1406 GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1)
1407 & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff)));
1409 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
1410 op0,
1411 gen_rtx_IOR (mode, temp,
1412 GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) & 0x3ff))));
1414 else
1416 /* A symbol, emit in the traditional way. */
1417 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp,
1418 gen_rtx_HIGH (mode, op1)));
1419 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
1420 op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (mode, temp, op1)));
1426 /* SPARC-v9 code-model support. */
1427 void
1428 sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx temp1)
1430 rtx ti_temp1 = 0;
1432 if (temp1 && GET_MODE (temp1) == TImode)
1434 ti_temp1 = temp1;
1435 temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1));
1438 switch (sparc_cmodel)
1440 case CM_MEDLOW:
1441 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
1442 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
1443 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
1444 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).
1446 The executable must be in the low 4TB of the virtual address
1447 space.
1449 sethi %hi(symbol), %temp
1450 or %temp, %lo(symbol), %reg */
1451 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp1, gen_rtx_HIGH (DImode, op1)));
1452 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (DImode, temp1, op1)));
1453 break;
1455 case CM_MEDMID:
1456 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
1457 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
1458 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
1459 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).
1461 The executable must be in the low 16TB of the virtual address
1462 space.
1464 sethi %h44(symbol), %temp1
1465 or %temp1, %m44(symbol), %temp2
1466 sllx %temp2, 12, %temp3
1467 or %temp3, %l44(symbol), %reg */
1468 emit_insn (gen_seth44 (op0, op1));
1469 emit_insn (gen_setm44 (op0, op0, op1));
1470 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp1,
1471 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (12))));
1472 emit_insn (gen_setl44 (op0, temp1, op1));
1473 break;
1475 case CM_MEDANY:
1476 /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
1477 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
1478 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
1479 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).
1481 The executable can be placed anywhere in the virtual address
1482 space.
1484 sethi %hh(symbol), %temp1
1485 sethi %lm(symbol), %temp2
1486 or %temp1, %hm(symbol), %temp3
1487 or %temp2, %lo(symbol), %temp4
1488 sllx %temp3, 32, %temp5
1489 or %temp4, %temp5, %reg */
1491 /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2]
1492 might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made
1493 it TImode). Pick the other one to use as our scratch. */
1494 if (rtx_equal_p (temp1, op0))
1496 if (ti_temp1)
1497 temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1) + 1);
1498 else
1499 abort();
1502 emit_insn (gen_sethh (op0, op1));
1503 emit_insn (gen_setlm (temp1, op1));
1504 emit_insn (gen_sethm (op0, op0, op1));
1505 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1506 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (32))));
1507 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1508 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, op0, temp1)));
1509 emit_insn (gen_setlo (op0, op0, op1));
1510 break;
1512 case CM_EMBMEDANY:
1513 /* Old old old backwards compatibility kruft here.
1514 Essentially it is MEDLOW with a fixed 64-bit
1515 virtual base added to all data segment addresses.
1516 Text-segment stuff is computed like MEDANY, we can't
1517 reuse the code above because the relocation knobs
1518 look different.
1520 Data segment: sethi %hi(symbol), %temp1
1521 or %temp1, %lo(symbol), %temp2
1522 add %temp2, EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, %reg
1524 Text segment: sethi %uhi(symbol), %temp1
1525 sethi %hi(symbol), %temp2
1526 or %temp1, %ulo(symbol), %temp3
1527 or %temp2, %lo(symbol), %temp4
1528 sllx %temp3, 32, %temp5
1529 or %temp4, %temp5, %reg */
1530 if (data_segment_operand (op1, GET_MODE (op1)))
1532 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_sethi (temp1, op1));
1533 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_brsum (op0, temp1));
1534 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_losum (op0, op0, op1));
1536 else
1538 /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2]
1539 might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made
1540 it TImode). Pick the other one to use as our scratch. */
1541 if (rtx_equal_p (temp1, op0))
1543 if (ti_temp1)
1544 temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1) + 1);
1545 else
1546 abort();
1549 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textuhi (op0, op1));
1550 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_texthi (temp1, op1));
1551 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textulo (op0, op0, op1));
1552 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1553 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (32))));
1554 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1555 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, op0, temp1)));
1556 emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textlo (op0, op0, op1));
1558 break;
1560 default:
1561 abort();
1565 /* These avoid problems when cross compiling. If we do not
1566 go through all this hair then the optimizer will see
1567 invalid REG_EQUAL notes or in some cases none at all. */
1568 static void sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT);
1569 static rtx gen_safe_SET64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT);
1570 static rtx gen_safe_OR64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT);
1571 static rtx gen_safe_XOR64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT);
1573 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1574 #define GEN_HIGHINT64(__x) GEN_INT ((__x) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff)
1575 #define GEN_INT64(__x) GEN_INT (__x)
1576 #else
1577 #define GEN_HIGHINT64(__x) \
1578 immed_double_const ((__x) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff, 0, DImode)
1579 #define GEN_INT64(__x) \
1580 immed_double_const ((__x) & 0xffffffff, \
1581 ((__x) & 0x80000000 ? -1 : 0), DImode)
1582 #endif
1584 /* The optimizer is not to assume anything about exactly
1585 which bits are set for a HIGH, they are unspecified.
1586 Unfortunately this leads to many missed optimizations
1587 during CSE. We mask out the non-HIGH bits, and matches
1588 a plain movdi, to alleviate this problem. */
1589 static void
1590 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (rtx dest, HOST_WIDE_INT val)
1592 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_HIGHINT64 (val)));
1595 static rtx
1596 gen_safe_SET64 (rtx dest, HOST_WIDE_INT val)
1598 return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_INT64 (val));
1601 static rtx
1602 gen_safe_OR64 (rtx src, HOST_WIDE_INT val)
1604 return gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT64 (val));
1607 static rtx
1608 gen_safe_XOR64 (rtx src, HOST_WIDE_INT val)
1610 return gen_rtx_XOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT64 (val));
1613 /* Worker routines for 64-bit constant formation on arch64.
1614 One of the key things to be doing in these emissions is
1615 to create as many temp REGs as possible. This makes it
1616 possible for half-built constants to be used later when
1617 such values are similar to something required later on.
1618 Without doing this, the optimizer cannot see such
1619 opportunities. */
1621 static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (rtx, rtx,
1622 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int);
1624 static void
1625 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (rtx op0, rtx temp,
1626 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits, int is_neg)
1628 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits;
1630 if (is_neg)
1631 high_bits = (~low_bits) & 0xffffffff;
1632 else
1633 high_bits = low_bits;
1635 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
1636 if (!is_neg)
1638 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1639 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
1641 else
1643 /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement
1644 instead. This way the combiner will notice logical operations
1645 such as ANDN later on and substitute. */
1646 if ((low_bits & 0x3ff) == 0x3ff)
1648 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1649 gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp)));
1651 else
1653 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1654 gen_safe_XOR64 (temp,
1655 (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x400
1656 | (low_bits & 0x3ff)))));
1661 static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1662 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int);
1664 static void
1665 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (rtx op0, rtx temp,
1666 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
1667 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_immediate,
1668 int shift_count)
1670 rtx temp2 = op0;
1672 if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0)
1674 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
1675 if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
1676 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1677 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
1678 else
1679 temp2 = temp;
1681 else
1683 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits));
1684 temp2 = temp;
1687 /* Now shift it up into place. */
1688 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1689 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp2,
1690 GEN_INT (shift_count))));
1692 /* If there is a low immediate part piece, finish up by
1693 putting that in as well. */
1694 if (low_immediate != 0)
1695 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1696 gen_safe_OR64 (op0, low_immediate)));
1699 static void sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1700 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
1702 /* Full 64-bit constant decomposition. Even though this is the
1703 'worst' case, we still optimize a few things away. */
1704 static void
1705 sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (rtx op0, rtx temp,
1706 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
1707 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits)
1709 rtx sub_temp;
1711 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
1712 sub_temp = op0;
1713 else
1714 sub_temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1716 if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0)
1718 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
1719 if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
1720 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
1721 sub_temp,
1722 gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
1723 else
1724 sub_temp = temp;
1726 else
1728 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits));
1729 sub_temp = temp;
1732 if (!reload_in_progress && !reload_completed)
1734 rtx temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1735 rtx temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1736 rtx temp4 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1738 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp4,
1739 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1740 GEN_INT (32))));
1742 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp2, low_bits);
1743 if ((low_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
1745 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp3,
1746 gen_safe_OR64 (temp2, (low_bits & 0x3ff))));
1747 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1748 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp3)));
1750 else
1752 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1753 gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp2)));
1756 else
1758 rtx low1 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12)) & 0xfff);
1759 rtx low2 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12)) & 0xfff);
1760 rtx low3 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12 - 8)) & 0x0ff);
1761 int to_shift = 12;
1763 /* We are in the middle of reload, so this is really
1764 painful. However we do still make an attempt to
1765 avoid emitting truly stupid code. */
1766 if (low1 != const0_rtx)
1768 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1769 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1770 GEN_INT (to_shift))));
1771 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1772 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low1)));
1773 sub_temp = op0;
1774 to_shift = 12;
1776 else
1778 to_shift += 12;
1780 if (low2 != const0_rtx)
1782 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1783 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1784 GEN_INT (to_shift))));
1785 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1786 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low2)));
1787 sub_temp = op0;
1788 to_shift = 8;
1790 else
1792 to_shift += 8;
1794 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1795 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
1796 GEN_INT (to_shift))));
1797 if (low3 != const0_rtx)
1798 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
1799 gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low3)));
1800 /* phew... */
1804 /* Analyze a 64-bit constant for certain properties. */
1805 static void analyze_64bit_constant (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1806 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1807 int *, int *, int *);
1809 static void
1810 analyze_64bit_constant (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
1811 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits,
1812 int *hbsp, int *lbsp, int *abbasp)
1814 int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set;
1815 int i;
1817 lowest_bit_set = highest_bit_set = -1;
1818 i = 0;
1821 if ((lowest_bit_set == -1)
1822 && ((low_bits >> i) & 1))
1823 lowest_bit_set = i;
1824 if ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1825 && ((high_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1))
1826 highest_bit_set = (64 - i - 1);
1828 while (++i < 32
1829 && ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1830 || (lowest_bit_set == -1)));
1831 if (i == 32)
1833 i = 0;
1836 if ((lowest_bit_set == -1)
1837 && ((high_bits >> i) & 1))
1838 lowest_bit_set = i + 32;
1839 if ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1840 && ((low_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1))
1841 highest_bit_set = 32 - i - 1;
1843 while (++i < 32
1844 && ((highest_bit_set == -1)
1845 || (lowest_bit_set == -1)));
1847 /* If there are no bits set this should have gone out
1848 as one instruction! */
1849 if (lowest_bit_set == -1
1850 || highest_bit_set == -1)
1851 abort ();
1852 all_bits_between_are_set = 1;
1853 for (i = lowest_bit_set; i <= highest_bit_set; i++)
1855 if (i < 32)
1857 if ((low_bits & (1 << i)) != 0)
1858 continue;
1860 else
1862 if ((high_bits & (1 << (i - 32))) != 0)
1863 continue;
1865 all_bits_between_are_set = 0;
1866 break;
1868 *hbsp = highest_bit_set;
1869 *lbsp = lowest_bit_set;
1870 *abbasp = all_bits_between_are_set;
1873 static int const64_is_2insns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
1875 static int
1876 const64_is_2insns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
1877 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits)
1879 int highest_bit_set, lowest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set;
1881 if (high_bits == 0
1882 || high_bits == 0xffffffff)
1883 return 1;
1885 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits,
1886 &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set,
1887 &all_bits_between_are_set);
1889 if ((highest_bit_set == 63
1890 || lowest_bit_set == 0)
1891 && all_bits_between_are_set != 0)
1892 return 1;
1894 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21)
1895 return 1;
1897 return 0;
1900 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT create_simple_focus_bits (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1901 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
1902 int, int);
1904 static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
1905 create_simple_focus_bits (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
1906 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits,
1907 int lowest_bit_set, int shift)
1909 HOST_WIDE_INT hi, lo;
1911 if (lowest_bit_set < 32)
1913 lo = (low_bits >> lowest_bit_set) << shift;
1914 hi = ((high_bits << (32 - lowest_bit_set)) << shift);
1916 else
1918 lo = 0;
1919 hi = ((high_bits >> (lowest_bit_set - 32)) << shift);
1921 if (hi & lo)
1922 abort ();
1923 return (hi | lo);
1926 /* Here we are sure to be arch64 and this is an integer constant
1927 being loaded into a register. Emit the most efficient
1928 insn sequence possible. Detection of all the 1-insn cases
1929 has been done already. */
1930 void
1931 sparc_emit_set_const64 (rtx op0, rtx op1)
1933 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
1934 int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set;
1935 int all_bits_between_are_set;
1936 rtx temp;
1938 /* Sanity check that we know what we are working with. */
1939 if (! TARGET_ARCH64)
1940 abort ();
1942 if (GET_CODE (op0) != SUBREG)
1944 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG
1945 || (REGNO (op0) >= SPARC_FIRST_FP_REG
1946 && REGNO (op0) <= SPARC_LAST_V9_FP_REG))
1947 abort ();
1950 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
1951 temp = op0;
1952 else
1953 temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
1955 if (GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
1956 && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT)
1958 sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (op0, op1, temp);
1959 return;
1962 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
1964 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1965 high_bits = (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1) >> 32) & 0xffffffff;
1966 low_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1) & 0xffffffff;
1967 #else
1968 high_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
1969 low_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1);
1970 #endif
1972 else
1974 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
1975 high_bits = ((INTVAL (op1) >> 32) & 0xffffffff);
1976 low_bits = (INTVAL (op1) & 0xffffffff);
1977 #else
1978 high_bits = ((INTVAL (op1) < 0) ?
1979 0xffffffff :
1980 0x00000000);
1981 low_bits = INTVAL (op1);
1982 #endif
1985 /* low_bits bits 0 --> 31
1986 high_bits bits 32 --> 63 */
1988 analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits,
1989 &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set,
1990 &all_bits_between_are_set);
1992 /* First try for a 2-insn sequence. */
1994 /* These situations are preferred because the optimizer can
1995 * do more things with them:
1996 * 1) mov -1, %reg
1997 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg
1998 * 2) mov -1, %reg
1999 * srlx %reg, shift, %reg
2000 * 3) mov some_small_const, %reg
2001 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg
2003 if (((highest_bit_set == 63
2004 || lowest_bit_set == 0)
2005 && all_bits_between_are_set != 0)
2006 || ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 12))
2008 HOST_WIDE_INT the_const = -1;
2009 int shift = lowest_bit_set;
2011 if ((highest_bit_set != 63
2012 && lowest_bit_set != 0)
2013 || all_bits_between_are_set == 0)
2015 the_const =
2016 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
2017 lowest_bit_set, 0);
2019 else if (lowest_bit_set == 0)
2020 shift = -(63 - highest_bit_set);
2022 if (! SPARC_SIMM13_P (the_const))
2023 abort ();
2025 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, the_const));
2026 if (shift > 0)
2027 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2028 op0,
2029 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode,
2030 temp,
2031 GEN_INT (shift))));
2032 else if (shift < 0)
2033 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2034 op0,
2035 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode,
2036 temp,
2037 GEN_INT (-shift))));
2038 else
2039 abort ();
2040 return;
2043 /* Now a range of 22 or less bits set somewhere.
2044 * 1) sethi %hi(focus_bits), %reg
2045 * sllx %reg, shift, %reg
2046 * 2) sethi %hi(focus_bits), %reg
2047 * srlx %reg, shift, %reg
2049 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21)
2051 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits =
2052 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
2053 lowest_bit_set, 10);
2055 if (! SPARC_SETHI_P (focus_bits))
2056 abort ();
2058 sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, focus_bits);
2060 /* If lowest_bit_set == 10 then a sethi alone could have done it. */
2061 if (lowest_bit_set < 10)
2062 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2063 op0,
2064 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode, temp,
2065 GEN_INT (10 - lowest_bit_set))));
2066 else if (lowest_bit_set > 10)
2067 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2068 op0,
2069 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp,
2070 GEN_INT (lowest_bit_set - 10))));
2071 else
2072 abort ();
2073 return;
2076 /* 1) sethi %hi(low_bits), %reg
2077 * or %reg, %lo(low_bits), %reg
2078 * 2) sethi %hi(~low_bits), %reg
2079 * xor %reg, %lo(-0x400 | (low_bits & 0x3ff)), %reg
2081 if (high_bits == 0
2082 || high_bits == 0xffffffff)
2084 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (op0, temp, low_bits,
2085 (high_bits == 0xffffffff));
2086 return;
2089 /* Now, try 3-insn sequences. */
2091 /* 1) sethi %hi(high_bits), %reg
2092 * or %reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg
2093 * sllx %reg, 32, %reg
2095 if (low_bits == 0)
2097 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, 0, 32);
2098 return;
2101 /* We may be able to do something quick
2102 when the constant is negated, so try that. */
2103 if (const64_is_2insns ((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff,
2104 (~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00))
2106 /* NOTE: The trailing bits get XOR'd so we need the
2107 non-negated bits, not the negated ones. */
2108 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT trailing_bits = low_bits & 0x3ff;
2110 if ((((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0
2111 && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) == 0)
2112 || (((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0xffffffff
2113 && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) != 0))
2115 int fast_int = (~low_bits & 0xffffffff);
2117 if ((SPARC_SETHI_P (fast_int)
2118 && (~high_bits & 0xffffffff) == 0)
2119 || SPARC_SIMM13_P (fast_int))
2120 emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, fast_int));
2121 else
2122 sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, GEN_INT64 (fast_int));
2124 else
2126 rtx negated_const;
2127 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
2128 negated_const = GEN_INT (((~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00) |
2129 (((HOST_WIDE_INT)((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff))<<32));
2130 #else
2131 negated_const = immed_double_const ((~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00,
2132 (~high_bits) & 0xffffffff,
2133 DImode);
2134 #endif
2135 sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, negated_const);
2138 /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement
2139 instead. This way the combiner will notice logical operations
2140 such as ANDN later on and substitute. */
2141 if (trailing_bits == 0x3ff)
2143 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
2144 gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp)));
2146 else
2148 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2149 op0,
2150 gen_safe_XOR64 (temp,
2151 (-0x400 | trailing_bits))));
2153 return;
2156 /* 1) sethi %hi(xxx), %reg
2157 * or %reg, %lo(xxx), %reg
2158 * sllx %reg, yyy, %reg
2160 * ??? This is just a generalized version of the low_bits==0
2161 * thing above, FIXME...
2163 if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 32)
2165 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits =
2166 create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
2167 lowest_bit_set, 0);
2169 /* We can't get here in this state. */
2170 if (highest_bit_set < 32
2171 || lowest_bit_set >= 32)
2172 abort ();
2174 /* So what we know is that the set bits straddle the
2175 middle of the 64-bit word. */
2176 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp,
2177 focus_bits, 0,
2178 lowest_bit_set);
2179 return;
2182 /* 1) sethi %hi(high_bits), %reg
2183 * or %reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg
2184 * sllx %reg, 32, %reg
2185 * or %reg, low_bits, %reg
2187 if (SPARC_SIMM13_P(low_bits)
2188 && ((int)low_bits > 0))
2190 sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits, 32);
2191 return;
2194 /* The easiest way when all else fails, is full decomposition. */
2195 #if 0
2196 printf ("sparc_emit_set_const64: Hard constant [%08lx%08lx] neg[%08lx%08lx]\n",
2197 high_bits, low_bits, ~high_bits, ~low_bits);
2198 #endif
2199 sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits);
2202 /* Given a comparison code (EQ, NE, etc.) and the first operand of a COMPARE,
2203 return the mode to be used for the comparison. For floating-point,
2204 CCFP[E]mode is used. CC_NOOVmode should be used when the first operand
2205 is a PLUS, MINUS, NEG, or ASHIFT. CCmode should be used when no special
2206 processing is needed. */
2208 enum machine_mode
2209 select_cc_mode (enum rtx_code op, rtx x, rtx y ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
2211 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
2213 switch (op)
2215 case EQ:
2216 case NE:
2217 case UNORDERED:
2218 case ORDERED:
2219 case UNLT:
2220 case UNLE:
2221 case UNGT:
2222 case UNGE:
2223 case UNEQ:
2224 case LTGT:
2225 return CCFPmode;
2227 case LT:
2228 case LE:
2229 case GT:
2230 case GE:
2231 return CCFPEmode;
2233 default:
2234 abort ();
2237 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS || GET_CODE (x) == MINUS
2238 || GET_CODE (x) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT)
2240 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
2241 return CCX_NOOVmode;
2242 else
2243 return CC_NOOVmode;
2245 else
2247 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
2248 return CCXmode;
2249 else
2250 return CCmode;
2254 /* X and Y are two things to compare using CODE. Emit the compare insn and
2255 return the rtx for the cc reg in the proper mode. */
2258 gen_compare_reg (enum rtx_code code, rtx x, rtx y)
2260 enum machine_mode mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (code, x, y);
2261 rtx cc_reg;
2263 /* ??? We don't have movcc patterns so we cannot generate pseudo regs for the
2264 fcc regs (cse can't tell they're really call clobbered regs and will
2265 remove a duplicate comparison even if there is an intervening function
2266 call - it will then try to reload the cc reg via an int reg which is why
2267 we need the movcc patterns). It is possible to provide the movcc
2268 patterns by using the ldxfsr/stxfsr v9 insns. I tried it: you need two
2269 registers (say %g1,%g5) and it takes about 6 insns. A better fix would be
2270 to tell cse that CCFPE mode registers (even pseudos) are call
2271 clobbered. */
2273 /* ??? This is an experiment. Rather than making changes to cse which may
2274 or may not be easy/clean, we do our own cse. This is possible because
2275 we will generate hard registers. Cse knows they're call clobbered (it
2276 doesn't know the same thing about pseudos). If we guess wrong, no big
2277 deal, but if we win, great! */
2279 if (TARGET_V9 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
2280 #if 1 /* experiment */
2282 int reg;
2283 /* We cycle through the registers to ensure they're all exercised. */
2284 static int next_fcc_reg = 0;
2285 /* Previous x,y for each fcc reg. */
2286 static rtx prev_args[4][2];
2288 /* Scan prev_args for x,y. */
2289 for (reg = 0; reg < 4; reg++)
2290 if (prev_args[reg][0] == x && prev_args[reg][1] == y)
2291 break;
2292 if (reg == 4)
2294 reg = next_fcc_reg;
2295 prev_args[reg][0] = x;
2296 prev_args[reg][1] = y;
2297 next_fcc_reg = (next_fcc_reg + 1) & 3;
2299 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, reg + SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG);
2301 #else
2302 cc_reg = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
2303 #endif /* ! experiment */
2304 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
2305 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_FCC_REG);
2306 else
2307 cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_ICC_REG);
2309 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, cc_reg,
2310 gen_rtx_COMPARE (mode, x, y)));
2312 return cc_reg;
2315 /* This function is used for v9 only.
2316 CODE is the code for an Scc's comparison.
2317 OPERANDS[0] is the target of the Scc insn.
2318 OPERANDS[1] is the value we compare against const0_rtx (which hasn't
2319 been generated yet).
2321 This function is needed to turn
2323 (set (reg:SI 110)
2324 (gt (reg:CCX 100 %icc)
2325 (const_int 0)))
2326 into
2327 (set (reg:SI 110)
2328 (gt:DI (reg:CCX 100 %icc)
2329 (const_int 0)))
2331 IE: The instruction recognizer needs to see the mode of the comparison to
2332 find the right instruction. We could use "gt:DI" right in the
2333 define_expand, but leaving it out allows us to handle DI, SI, etc.
2335 We refer to the global sparc compare operands sparc_compare_op0 and
2336 sparc_compare_op1. */
2339 gen_v9_scc (enum rtx_code compare_code, register rtx *operands)
2341 rtx temp, op0, op1;
2343 if (! TARGET_ARCH64
2344 && (GET_MODE (sparc_compare_op0) == DImode
2345 || GET_MODE (operands[0]) == DImode))
2346 return 0;
2348 op0 = sparc_compare_op0;
2349 op1 = sparc_compare_op1;
2351 /* Try to use the movrCC insns. */
2352 if (TARGET_ARCH64
2353 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
2354 && op1 == const0_rtx
2355 && v9_regcmp_p (compare_code))
2357 /* Special case for op0 != 0. This can be done with one instruction if
2358 operands[0] == sparc_compare_op0. */
2360 if (compare_code == NE
2361 && GET_MODE (operands[0]) == DImode
2362 && rtx_equal_p (op0, operands[0]))
2364 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
2365 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (DImode,
2366 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode,
2367 op0, const0_rtx),
2368 const1_rtx,
2369 operands[0])));
2370 return 1;
2373 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (operands[0], op0))
2375 /* Handle the case where operands[0] == sparc_compare_op0.
2376 We "early clobber" the result. */
2377 op0 = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (sparc_compare_op0));
2378 emit_move_insn (op0, sparc_compare_op0);
2381 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0], const0_rtx));
2382 if (GET_MODE (op0) != DImode)
2384 temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
2385 convert_move (temp, op0, 0);
2387 else
2388 temp = op0;
2389 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
2390 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (operands[0]),
2391 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode,
2392 temp, const0_rtx),
2393 const1_rtx,
2394 operands[0])));
2395 return 1;
2397 else
2399 operands[1] = gen_compare_reg (compare_code, op0, op1);
2401 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
2403 case CCmode :
2404 case CCXmode :
2405 case CCFPEmode :
2406 case CCFPmode :
2407 break;
2408 default :
2409 abort ();
2411 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0], const0_rtx));
2412 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
2413 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (operands[0]),
2414 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code,
2415 GET_MODE (operands[1]),
2416 operands[1], const0_rtx),
2417 const1_rtx, operands[0])));
2418 return 1;
2422 /* Emit a conditional jump insn for the v9 architecture using comparison code
2423 CODE and jump target LABEL.
2424 This function exists to take advantage of the v9 brxx insns. */
2426 void
2427 emit_v9_brxx_insn (enum rtx_code code, rtx op0, rtx label)
2429 emit_jump_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
2430 pc_rtx,
2431 gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (VOIDmode,
2432 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (op0),
2433 op0, const0_rtx),
2434 gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (VOIDmode, label),
2435 pc_rtx)));
2438 /* Generate a DFmode part of a hard TFmode register.
2439 REG is the TFmode hard register, LOW is 1 for the
2440 low 64bit of the register and 0 otherwise.
2443 gen_df_reg (rtx reg, int low)
2445 int regno = REGNO (reg);
2447 if ((WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0) ^ (low != 0))
2448 regno += (TARGET_ARCH64 && regno < 32) ? 1 : 2;
2449 return gen_rtx_REG (DFmode, regno);
2452 /* Generate a call to FUNC with OPERANDS. Operand 0 is the return value.
2453 Unlike normal calls, TFmode operands are passed by reference. It is
2454 assumed that no more than 3 operands are required. */
2456 static void
2457 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (const char *func_name, int nargs, rtx *operands)
2459 rtx ret_slot = NULL, arg[3], func_sym;
2460 int i;
2462 /* We only expect to be called for conversions, unary, and binary ops. */
2463 if (nargs < 2 || nargs > 3)
2464 abort ();
2466 for (i = 0; i < nargs; ++i)
2468 rtx this_arg = operands[i];
2469 rtx this_slot;
2471 /* TFmode arguments and return values are passed by reference. */
2472 if (GET_MODE (this_arg) == TFmode)
2474 int force_stack_temp;
2476 force_stack_temp = 0;
2477 if (TARGET_BUGGY_QP_LIB && i == 0)
2478 force_stack_temp = 1;
2480 if (GET_CODE (this_arg) == MEM
2481 && ! force_stack_temp)
2482 this_arg = XEXP (this_arg, 0);
2483 else if (CONSTANT_P (this_arg)
2484 && ! force_stack_temp)
2486 this_slot = force_const_mem (TFmode, this_arg);
2487 this_arg = XEXP (this_slot, 0);
2489 else
2491 this_slot = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE (TFmode), 0);
2493 /* Operand 0 is the return value. We'll copy it out later. */
2494 if (i > 0)
2495 emit_move_insn (this_slot, this_arg);
2496 else
2497 ret_slot = this_slot;
2499 this_arg = XEXP (this_slot, 0);
2503 arg[i] = this_arg;
2506 func_sym = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, func_name);
2508 if (GET_MODE (operands[0]) == TFmode)
2510 if (nargs == 2)
2511 emit_library_call (func_sym, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 2,
2512 arg[0], GET_MODE (arg[0]),
2513 arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]));
2514 else
2515 emit_library_call (func_sym, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 3,
2516 arg[0], GET_MODE (arg[0]),
2517 arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]),
2518 arg[2], GET_MODE (arg[2]));
2520 if (ret_slot)
2521 emit_move_insn (operands[0], ret_slot);
2523 else
2525 rtx ret;
2527 if (nargs != 2)
2528 abort ();
2530 ret = emit_library_call_value (func_sym, operands[0], LCT_NORMAL,
2531 GET_MODE (operands[0]), 1,
2532 arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]));
2534 if (ret != operands[0])
2535 emit_move_insn (operands[0], ret);
2539 /* Expand soft-float TFmode calls to sparc abi routines. */
2541 static void
2542 emit_soft_tfmode_binop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
2544 const char *func;
2546 switch (code)
2548 case PLUS:
2549 func = "_Qp_add";
2550 break;
2551 case MINUS:
2552 func = "_Qp_sub";
2553 break;
2554 case MULT:
2555 func = "_Qp_mul";
2556 break;
2557 case DIV:
2558 func = "_Qp_div";
2559 break;
2560 default:
2561 abort ();
2564 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 3, operands);
2567 static void
2568 emit_soft_tfmode_unop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
2570 const char *func;
2572 switch (code)
2574 case SQRT:
2575 func = "_Qp_sqrt";
2576 break;
2577 default:
2578 abort ();
2581 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 2, operands);
2584 static void
2585 emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
2587 const char *func;
2589 switch (code)
2591 case FLOAT_EXTEND:
2592 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
2594 case SFmode:
2595 func = "_Qp_stoq";
2596 break;
2597 case DFmode:
2598 func = "_Qp_dtoq";
2599 break;
2600 default:
2601 abort ();
2603 break;
2605 case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
2606 switch (GET_MODE (operands[0]))
2608 case SFmode:
2609 func = "_Qp_qtos";
2610 break;
2611 case DFmode:
2612 func = "_Qp_qtod";
2613 break;
2614 default:
2615 abort ();
2617 break;
2619 case FLOAT:
2620 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
2622 case SImode:
2623 func = "_Qp_itoq";
2624 break;
2625 case DImode:
2626 func = "_Qp_xtoq";
2627 break;
2628 default:
2629 abort ();
2631 break;
2633 case UNSIGNED_FLOAT:
2634 switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
2636 case SImode:
2637 func = "_Qp_uitoq";
2638 break;
2639 case DImode:
2640 func = "_Qp_uxtoq";
2641 break;
2642 default:
2643 abort ();
2645 break;
2647 case FIX:
2648 switch (GET_MODE (operands[0]))
2650 case SImode:
2651 func = "_Qp_qtoi";
2652 break;
2653 case DImode:
2654 func = "_Qp_qtox";
2655 break;
2656 default:
2657 abort ();
2659 break;
2661 case UNSIGNED_FIX:
2662 switch (GET_MODE (operands[0]))
2664 case SImode:
2665 func = "_Qp_qtoui";
2666 break;
2667 case DImode:
2668 func = "_Qp_qtoux";
2669 break;
2670 default:
2671 abort ();
2673 break;
2675 default:
2676 abort ();
2679 emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 2, operands);
2682 /* Expand a hard-float tfmode operation. All arguments must be in
2683 registers. */
2685 static void
2686 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
2688 rtx op, dest;
2690 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '1')
2692 operands[1] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[1]), operands[1]);
2693 op = gen_rtx_fmt_e (code, GET_MODE (operands[0]), operands[1]);
2695 else
2697 operands[1] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[1]), operands[1]);
2698 operands[2] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[2]), operands[2]);
2699 op = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (operands[0]),
2700 operands[1], operands[2]);
2703 if (register_operand (operands[0], VOIDmode))
2704 dest = operands[0];
2705 else
2706 dest = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (operands[0]));
2708 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, op));
2710 if (dest != operands[0])
2711 emit_move_insn (operands[0], dest);
2714 void
2715 emit_tfmode_binop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
2717 if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD)
2718 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands);
2719 else
2720 emit_soft_tfmode_binop (code, operands);
2723 void
2724 emit_tfmode_unop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
2726 if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD)
2727 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands);
2728 else
2729 emit_soft_tfmode_unop (code, operands);
2732 void
2733 emit_tfmode_cvt (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
2735 if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD)
2736 emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands);
2737 else
2738 emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (code, operands);
2741 /* Return nonzero if a return peephole merging return with
2742 setting of output register is ok. */
2744 leaf_return_peephole_ok (void)
2746 return (actual_fsize == 0);
2749 /* Return nonzero if a branch/jump/call instruction will be emitting
2750 nop into its delay slot. */
2753 empty_delay_slot (rtx insn)
2755 rtx seq;
2757 /* If no previous instruction (should not happen), return true. */
2758 if (PREV_INSN (insn) == NULL)
2759 return 1;
2761 seq = NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn));
2762 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq)) == SEQUENCE)
2763 return 0;
2765 return 1;
2768 /* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the function epilogue's
2769 delay slot. SLOT is the slot we are trying to fill. */
2772 eligible_for_epilogue_delay (rtx trial, int slot)
2774 rtx pat, src;
2776 if (slot >= 1)
2777 return 0;
2779 if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET)
2780 return 0;
2782 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
2783 return 0;
2785 /* If there are any call-saved registers, we should scan TRIAL if it
2786 does not reference them. For now just make it easy. */
2787 if (num_gfregs)
2788 return 0;
2790 /* If the function uses __builtin_eh_return, the eh_return machinery
2791 occupies the delay slot. */
2792 if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
2793 return 0;
2795 /* In the case of a true leaf function, anything can go into the delay slot.
2796 A delay slot only exists however if the frame size is zero, otherwise
2797 we will put an insn to adjust the stack after the return. */
2798 if (current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs)
2800 if (leaf_return_peephole_ok ())
2801 return ((get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial)
2802 == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE));
2803 return 0;
2806 pat = PATTERN (trial);
2808 /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with
2809 a `restore' or `return' insn can go into the delay slot. */
2810 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG
2811 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24)
2812 return 0;
2814 /* If this instruction sets up floating point register and we have a return
2815 instruction, it can probably go in. But restore will not work
2816 with FP_REGS. */
2817 if (REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32)
2819 if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1)
2820 && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE))
2821 return 1;
2822 return 0;
2825 /* The set of insns matched here must agree precisely with the set of
2826 patterns paired with a RETURN in sparc.md. */
2828 src = SET_SRC (pat);
2830 /* This matches "*return_[qhs]i" or even "*return_di" on TARGET_ARCH64. */
2831 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2832 && arith_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2834 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
2835 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2836 else
2837 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode);
2840 /* This matches "*return_di". */
2841 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2842 && arith_double_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2843 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2845 /* This matches "*return_sf_no_fpu". */
2846 else if (! TARGET_FPU && restore_operand (SET_DEST (pat), SFmode)
2847 && register_operand (src, SFmode))
2848 return 1;
2850 /* If we have return instruction, anything that does not use
2851 local or output registers and can go into a delay slot wins. */
2852 else if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1)
2853 && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE))
2854 return 1;
2856 /* This matches "*return_addsi". */
2857 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2858 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2859 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)
2860 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2861 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)))
2862 return 1;
2864 /* This matches "*return_adddi". */
2865 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2866 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2867 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)
2868 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2869 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)))
2870 return 1;
2872 /* This can match "*return_losum_[sd]i".
2873 Catch only some cases, so that return_losum* don't have
2874 to be too big. */
2875 else if (GET_CODE (src) == LO_SUM
2876 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
2877 && ((register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2878 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode))
2879 || (TARGET_ARCH64
2880 && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2881 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode))))
2882 return 1;
2884 /* sll{,x} reg,1,reg2 is add reg,reg,reg2 as well. */
2885 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT
2886 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2887 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode))
2888 && XEXP (src, 1) == const1_rtx)
2889 return 1;
2891 return 0;
2894 /* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the call delay slot. */
2896 tls_call_delay (rtx trial)
2898 rtx pat, unspec;
2900 /* Binutils allows
2901 call __tls_get_addr, %tgd_call (foo)
2902 add %l7, %o0, %o0, %tgd_add (foo)
2903 while Sun as/ld does not. */
2904 if (TARGET_GNU_TLS || !TARGET_TLS)
2905 return 1;
2907 pat = PATTERN (trial);
2908 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != PLUS)
2909 return 1;
2911 unspec = XEXP (SET_DEST (pat), 1);
2912 if (GET_CODE (unspec) != UNSPEC
2913 || (XINT (unspec, 1) != UNSPEC_TLSGD
2914 && XINT (unspec, 1) != UNSPEC_TLSLDM))
2915 return 1;
2917 return 0;
2920 /* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the sibling call
2921 delay slot. */
2924 eligible_for_sibcall_delay (rtx trial)
2926 rtx pat, src;
2928 if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET)
2929 return 0;
2931 if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
2932 return 0;
2934 pat = PATTERN (trial);
2936 if (current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs)
2938 /* If the tail call is done using the call instruction,
2939 we have to restore %o7 in the delay slot. */
2940 if ((TARGET_ARCH64 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDLOW) || flag_pic)
2941 return 0;
2943 /* %g1 is used to build the function address */
2944 if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1), pat))
2945 return 0;
2947 return 1;
2950 /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with
2951 a `restore' insn can go into the delay slot. */
2952 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG
2953 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24
2954 || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32)
2955 return 0;
2957 /* If it mentions %o7, it can't go in, because sibcall will clobber it
2958 in most cases. */
2959 if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 15), pat))
2960 return 0;
2962 src = SET_SRC (pat);
2964 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2965 && arith_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2967 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
2968 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2969 else
2970 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode);
2973 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
2974 && arith_double_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
2975 return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
2977 else if (! TARGET_FPU && restore_operand (SET_DEST (pat), SFmode)
2978 && register_operand (src, SFmode))
2979 return 1;
2981 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2982 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2983 && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)
2984 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2985 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)))
2986 return 1;
2988 else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
2989 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2990 && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)
2991 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
2992 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)))
2993 return 1;
2995 else if (GET_CODE (src) == LO_SUM
2996 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
2997 && ((register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
2998 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode))
2999 || (TARGET_ARCH64
3000 && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
3001 && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode))))
3002 return 1;
3004 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT
3005 && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
3006 || register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode))
3007 && XEXP (src, 1) == const1_rtx)
3008 return 1;
3010 return 0;
3013 static int
3014 check_return_regs (rtx x)
3016 switch (GET_CODE (x))
3018 case REG:
3019 return IN_OR_GLOBAL_P (x);
3021 case CONST_INT:
3022 case CONST_DOUBLE:
3023 case CONST:
3024 case SYMBOL_REF:
3025 case LABEL_REF:
3026 return 1;
3028 case SET:
3029 case IOR:
3030 case AND:
3031 case XOR:
3032 case PLUS:
3033 case MINUS:
3034 if (check_return_regs (XEXP (x, 1)) == 0)
3035 return 0;
3036 case NOT:
3037 case NEG:
3038 case MEM:
3039 return check_return_regs (XEXP (x, 0));
3041 default:
3042 return 0;
3048 short_branch (int uid1, int uid2)
3050 int delta = INSN_ADDRESSES (uid1) - INSN_ADDRESSES (uid2);
3052 /* Leave a few words of "slop". */
3053 if (delta >= -1023 && delta <= 1022)
3054 return 1;
3056 return 0;
3059 /* Return nonzero if REG is not used after INSN.
3060 We assume REG is a reload reg, and therefore does
3061 not live past labels or calls or jumps. */
3063 reg_unused_after (rtx reg, rtx insn)
3065 enum rtx_code code, prev_code = UNKNOWN;
3067 while ((insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)))
3069 if (prev_code == CALL_INSN && call_used_regs[REGNO (reg)])
3070 return 1;
3072 code = GET_CODE (insn);
3073 if (GET_CODE (insn) == CODE_LABEL)
3074 return 1;
3076 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
3078 rtx set = single_set (insn);
3079 int in_src = set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_SRC (set));
3080 if (set && in_src)
3081 return 0;
3082 if (set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_DEST (set)))
3083 return 1;
3084 if (set == 0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
3085 return 0;
3087 prev_code = code;
3089 return 1;
3092 /* Determine if it's legal to put X into the constant pool. This
3093 is not possible if X contains the address of a symbol that is
3094 not constant (TLS) or not known at final link time (PIC). */
3096 static bool
3097 sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (rtx x)
3099 switch (GET_CODE (x))
3101 case CONST_INT:
3102 case CONST_DOUBLE:
3103 /* Accept all non-symbolic constants. */
3104 return false;
3106 case LABEL_REF:
3107 /* Labels are OK iff we are non-PIC. */
3108 return flag_pic != 0;
3110 case SYMBOL_REF:
3111 /* 'Naked' TLS symbol references are never OK,
3112 non-TLS symbols are OK iff we are non-PIC. */
3113 if (SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (x))
3114 return true;
3115 else
3116 return flag_pic != 0;
3118 case CONST:
3119 return sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x, 0));
3120 case PLUS:
3121 case MINUS:
3122 return sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x, 0))
3123 || sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x, 1));
3124 case UNSPEC:
3125 return true;
3126 default:
3127 abort ();
3131 /* The table we use to reference PIC data. */
3132 static GTY(()) rtx global_offset_table;
3134 /* The function we use to get at it. */
3135 static GTY(()) rtx get_pc_symbol;
3136 static char get_pc_symbol_name[256];
3138 /* Ensure that we are not using patterns that are not OK with PIC. */
3141 check_pic (int i)
3143 switch (flag_pic)
3145 case 1:
3146 if (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == SYMBOL_REF
3147 || (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == CONST
3148 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0)) == MINUS
3149 && (XEXP (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), 0)
3150 == global_offset_table)
3151 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), 1))
3152 == CONST))))
3153 abort ();
3154 case 2:
3155 default:
3156 return 1;
3160 /* Return true if X is an address which needs a temporary register when
3161 reloaded while generating PIC code. */
3164 pic_address_needs_scratch (rtx x)
3166 /* An address which is a symbolic plus a non SMALL_INT needs a temp reg. */
3167 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
3168 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
3169 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
3170 && ! SMALL_INT (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))
3171 return 1;
3173 return 0;
3176 /* Determine if a given RTX is a valid constant. We already know this
3177 satisfies CONSTANT_P. */
3179 bool
3180 legitimate_constant_p (rtx x)
3182 rtx inner;
3184 switch (GET_CODE (x))
3186 case SYMBOL_REF:
3187 /* TLS symbols are not constant. */
3188 if (SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (x))
3189 return false;
3190 break;
3192 case CONST:
3193 inner = XEXP (x, 0);
3195 /* Offsets of TLS symbols are never valid.
3196 Discourage CSE from creating them. */
3197 if (GET_CODE (inner) == PLUS
3198 && tls_symbolic_operand (XEXP (inner, 0)))
3199 return false;
3200 break;
3202 case CONST_DOUBLE:
3203 if (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode)
3204 return true;
3206 /* Floating point constants are generally not ok.
3207 The only exception is 0.0 in VIS. */
3208 if (TARGET_VIS
3209 && (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode
3210 || GET_MODE (x) == DFmode
3211 || GET_MODE (x) == TFmode)
3212 && fp_zero_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
3213 return true;
3215 return false;
3217 default:
3218 break;
3221 return true;
3224 /* Determine if a given RTX is a valid constant address. */
3226 bool
3227 constant_address_p (rtx x)
3229 switch (GET_CODE (x))
3231 case LABEL_REF:
3232 case CONST_INT:
3233 case HIGH:
3234 return true;
3236 case CONST:
3237 if (flag_pic && pic_address_needs_scratch (x))
3238 return false;
3239 return legitimate_constant_p (x);
3241 case SYMBOL_REF:
3242 return !flag_pic && legitimate_constant_p (x);
3244 default:
3245 return false;
3249 /* Nonzero if the constant value X is a legitimate general operand
3250 when generating PIC code. It is given that flag_pic is on and
3251 that X satisfies CONSTANT_P or is a CONST_DOUBLE. */
3253 bool
3254 legitimate_pic_operand_p (rtx x)
3256 if (pic_address_needs_scratch (x))
3257 return false;
3258 if (tls_symbolic_operand (x)
3259 || (GET_CODE (x) == CONST
3260 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
3261 && tls_symbolic_operand (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))))
3262 return false;
3263 return true;
3266 /* Return nonzero if ADDR is a valid memory address.
3267 STRICT specifies whether strict register checking applies. */
3270 legitimate_address_p (enum machine_mode mode, rtx addr, int strict)
3272 rtx rs1 = NULL, rs2 = NULL, imm1 = NULL, imm2;
3274 if (REG_P (addr) || GET_CODE (addr) == SUBREG)
3275 rs1 = addr;
3276 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
3278 rs1 = XEXP (addr, 0);
3279 rs2 = XEXP (addr, 1);
3281 /* Canonicalize. REG comes first, if there are no regs,
3282 LO_SUM comes first. */
3283 if (!REG_P (rs1)
3284 && GET_CODE (rs1) != SUBREG
3285 && (REG_P (rs2)
3286 || GET_CODE (rs2) == SUBREG
3287 || (GET_CODE (rs2) == LO_SUM && GET_CODE (rs1) != LO_SUM)))
3289 rs1 = XEXP (addr, 1);
3290 rs2 = XEXP (addr, 0);
3293 if ((flag_pic == 1
3294 && rs1 == pic_offset_table_rtx
3295 && !REG_P (rs2)
3296 && GET_CODE (rs2) != SUBREG
3297 && GET_CODE (rs2) != LO_SUM
3298 && GET_CODE (rs2) != MEM
3299 && !tls_symbolic_operand (rs2)
3300 && (! symbolic_operand (rs2, VOIDmode) || mode == Pmode)
3301 && (GET_CODE (rs2) != CONST_INT || SMALL_INT (rs2)))
3302 || ((REG_P (rs1)
3303 || GET_CODE (rs1) == SUBREG)
3304 && RTX_OK_FOR_OFFSET_P (rs2)))
3306 imm1 = rs2;
3307 rs2 = NULL;
3309 else if ((REG_P (rs1) || GET_CODE (rs1) == SUBREG)
3310 && (REG_P (rs2) || GET_CODE (rs2) == SUBREG))
3312 /* We prohibit REG + REG for TFmode when there are no instructions
3313 which accept REG+REG instructions. We do this because REG+REG
3314 is not an offsetable address. If we get the situation in reload
3315 where source and destination of a movtf pattern are both MEMs with
3316 REG+REG address, then only one of them gets converted to an
3317 offsetable address. */
3318 if (mode == TFmode
3319 && !(TARGET_FPU && TARGET_ARCH64 && TARGET_V9
3320 && TARGET_HARD_QUAD))
3321 return 0;
3323 /* We prohibit REG + REG on ARCH32 if not optimizing for
3324 DFmode/DImode because then mem_min_alignment is likely to be zero
3325 after reload and the forced split would lack a matching splitter
3326 pattern. */
3327 if (TARGET_ARCH32 && !optimize
3328 && (mode == DFmode || mode == DImode))
3329 return 0;
3331 else if (USE_AS_OFFSETABLE_LO10
3332 && GET_CODE (rs1) == LO_SUM
3333 && TARGET_ARCH64
3334 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
3335 && RTX_OK_FOR_OLO10_P (rs2))
3337 imm2 = rs2;
3338 rs2 = NULL;
3339 imm1 = XEXP (rs1, 1);
3340 rs1 = XEXP (rs1, 0);
3341 if (! CONSTANT_P (imm1) || tls_symbolic_operand (rs1))
3342 return 0;
3345 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
3347 rs1 = XEXP (addr, 0);
3348 imm1 = XEXP (addr, 1);
3350 if (! CONSTANT_P (imm1) || tls_symbolic_operand (rs1))
3351 return 0;
3353 /* We can't allow TFmode, because an offset greater than or equal to the
3354 alignment (8) may cause the LO_SUM to overflow if !v9. */
3355 if (mode == TFmode && !TARGET_V9)
3356 return 0;
3358 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (addr))
3359 return 1;
3360 else
3361 return 0;
3363 if (GET_CODE (rs1) == SUBREG)
3364 rs1 = SUBREG_REG (rs1);
3365 if (!REG_P (rs1))
3366 return 0;
3368 if (rs2)
3370 if (GET_CODE (rs2) == SUBREG)
3371 rs2 = SUBREG_REG (rs2);
3372 if (!REG_P (rs2))
3373 return 0;
3376 if (strict)
3378 if (!REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (rs1))
3379 || (rs2 && !REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (rs2))))
3380 return 0;
3382 else
3384 if ((REGNO (rs1) >= 32
3385 && REGNO (rs1) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3386 && REGNO (rs1) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3387 || (rs2
3388 && (REGNO (rs2) >= 32
3389 && REGNO (rs2) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3390 && REGNO (rs2) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
3391 return 0;
3393 return 1;
3396 /* Construct the SYMBOL_REF for the tls_get_offset function. */
3398 static GTY(()) rtx sparc_tls_symbol;
3399 static rtx
3400 sparc_tls_get_addr (void)
3402 if (!sparc_tls_symbol)
3403 sparc_tls_symbol = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "__tls_get_addr");
3405 return sparc_tls_symbol;
3408 static rtx
3409 sparc_tls_got (void)
3411 rtx temp;
3412 if (flag_pic)
3414 current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;
3415 return pic_offset_table_rtx;
3418 if (!global_offset_table)
3419 global_offset_table = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_");
3420 temp = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3421 emit_move_insn (temp, global_offset_table);
3422 return temp;
3426 /* ADDR contains a thread-local SYMBOL_REF. Generate code to compute
3427 this (thread-local) address. */
3430 legitimize_tls_address (rtx addr)
3432 rtx temp1, temp2, temp3, ret, o0, got, insn;
3434 if (no_new_pseudos)
3435 abort ();
3437 if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF)
3438 switch (SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (addr))
3440 case TLS_MODEL_GLOBAL_DYNAMIC:
3441 start_sequence ();
3442 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
3443 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
3444 ret = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3445 o0 = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 8);
3446 got = sparc_tls_got ();
3447 emit_insn (gen_tgd_hi22 (temp1, addr));
3448 emit_insn (gen_tgd_lo10 (temp2, temp1, addr));
3449 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
3451 emit_insn (gen_tgd_add32 (o0, got, temp2, addr));
3452 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tgd_call32 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (),
3453 addr, const1_rtx));
3455 else
3457 emit_insn (gen_tgd_add64 (o0, got, temp2, addr));
3458 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tgd_call64 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (),
3459 addr, const1_rtx));
3461 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn)
3462 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, o0),
3463 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn));
3464 insn = get_insns ();
3465 end_sequence ();
3466 emit_libcall_block (insn, ret, o0, addr);
3467 break;
3469 case TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC:
3470 start_sequence ();
3471 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
3472 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
3473 temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3474 ret = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3475 o0 = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 8);
3476 got = sparc_tls_got ();
3477 emit_insn (gen_tldm_hi22 (temp1));
3478 emit_insn (gen_tldm_lo10 (temp2, temp1));
3479 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
3481 emit_insn (gen_tldm_add32 (o0, got, temp2));
3482 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tldm_call32 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (),
3483 const1_rtx));
3485 else
3487 emit_insn (gen_tldm_add64 (o0, got, temp2));
3488 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tldm_call64 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (),
3489 const1_rtx));
3491 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn)
3492 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, o0),
3493 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn));
3494 insn = get_insns ();
3495 end_sequence ();
3496 emit_libcall_block (insn, temp3, o0,
3497 gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode, gen_rtvec (1, const0_rtx),
3498 UNSPEC_TLSLD_BASE));
3499 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
3500 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
3501 emit_insn (gen_tldo_hix22 (temp1, addr));
3502 emit_insn (gen_tldo_lox10 (temp2, temp1, addr));
3503 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
3504 emit_insn (gen_tldo_add32 (ret, temp3, temp2, addr));
3505 else
3506 emit_insn (gen_tldo_add64 (ret, temp3, temp2, addr));
3507 break;
3509 case TLS_MODEL_INITIAL_EXEC:
3510 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
3511 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
3512 temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3513 got = sparc_tls_got ();
3514 emit_insn (gen_tie_hi22 (temp1, addr));
3515 emit_insn (gen_tie_lo10 (temp2, temp1, addr));
3516 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
3517 emit_insn (gen_tie_ld32 (temp3, got, temp2, addr));
3518 else
3519 emit_insn (gen_tie_ld64 (temp3, got, temp2, addr));
3520 if (TARGET_SUN_TLS)
3522 ret = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3523 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
3524 emit_insn (gen_tie_add32 (ret, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7),
3525 temp3, addr));
3526 else
3527 emit_insn (gen_tie_add64 (ret, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7),
3528 temp3, addr));
3530 else
3531 ret = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7), temp3);
3532 break;
3534 case TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_EXEC:
3535 temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3536 temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3537 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
3539 emit_insn (gen_tle_hix22_sp32 (temp1, addr));
3540 emit_insn (gen_tle_lox10_sp32 (temp2, temp1, addr));
3542 else
3544 emit_insn (gen_tle_hix22_sp64 (temp1, addr));
3545 emit_insn (gen_tle_lox10_sp64 (temp2, temp1, addr));
3547 ret = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7), temp2);
3548 break;
3550 default:
3551 abort ();
3554 else
3555 abort (); /* for now ... */
3557 return ret;
3561 /* Legitimize PIC addresses. If the address is already position-independent,
3562 we return ORIG. Newly generated position-independent addresses go into a
3563 reg. This is REG if nonzero, otherwise we allocate register(s) as
3564 necessary. */
3567 legitimize_pic_address (rtx orig, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
3568 rtx reg)
3570 if (GET_CODE (orig) == SYMBOL_REF)
3572 rtx pic_ref, address;
3573 rtx insn;
3575 if (reg == 0)
3577 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3578 abort ();
3579 else
3580 reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3583 if (flag_pic == 2)
3585 /* If not during reload, allocate another temp reg here for loading
3586 in the address, so that these instructions can be optimized
3587 properly. */
3588 rtx temp_reg = ((reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3589 ? reg : gen_reg_rtx (Pmode));
3591 /* Must put the SYMBOL_REF inside an UNSPEC here so that cse
3592 won't get confused into thinking that these two instructions
3593 are loading in the true address of the symbol. If in the
3594 future a PIC rtx exists, that should be used instead. */
3595 if (Pmode == SImode)
3597 emit_insn (gen_movsi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig));
3598 emit_insn (gen_movsi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig));
3600 else
3602 emit_insn (gen_movdi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig));
3603 emit_insn (gen_movdi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig));
3605 address = temp_reg;
3607 else
3608 address = orig;
3610 pic_ref = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode,
3611 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
3612 pic_offset_table_rtx, address));
3613 current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;
3614 RTX_UNCHANGING_P (pic_ref) = 1;
3615 insn = emit_move_insn (reg, pic_ref);
3616 /* Put a REG_EQUAL note on this insn, so that it can be optimized
3617 by loop. */
3618 REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (REG_EQUAL, orig,
3619 REG_NOTES (insn));
3620 return reg;
3622 else if (GET_CODE (orig) == CONST)
3624 rtx base, offset;
3626 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS
3627 && XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx)
3628 return orig;
3630 if (reg == 0)
3632 if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
3633 abort ();
3634 else
3635 reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
3638 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS)
3640 base = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0), Pmode, reg);
3641 offset = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 1), Pmode,
3642 base == reg ? 0 : reg);
3644 else
3645 abort ();
3647 if (GET_CODE (offset) == CONST_INT)
3649 if (SMALL_INT (offset))
3650 return plus_constant (base, INTVAL (offset));
3651 else if (! reload_in_progress && ! reload_completed)
3652 offset = force_reg (Pmode, offset);
3653 else
3654 /* If we reach here, then something is seriously wrong. */
3655 abort ();
3657 return gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, base, offset);
3659 else if (GET_CODE (orig) == LABEL_REF)
3660 /* ??? Why do we do this? */
3661 /* Now movsi_pic_label_ref uses it, but we ought to be checking that
3662 the register is live instead, in case it is eliminated. */
3663 current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;
3665 return orig;
3668 /* Try machine-dependent ways of modifying an illegitimate address X
3669 to be legitimate. If we find one, return the new, valid address.
3671 OLDX is the address as it was before break_out_memory_refs was called.
3672 In some cases it is useful to look at this to decide what needs to be done.
3674 MODE is the mode of the operand pointed to by X. */
3677 legitimize_address (rtx x, rtx oldx ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, enum machine_mode mode)
3679 rtx orig_x = x;
3681 if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT)
3682 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 1),
3683 force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX));
3684 if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT)
3685 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0),
3686 force_operand (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX));
3687 if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS)
3688 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX),
3689 XEXP (x, 1));
3690 if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == PLUS)
3691 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0),
3692 force_operand (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX));
3694 if (x != orig_x && legitimate_address_p (mode, x, FALSE))
3695 return x;
3697 if (tls_symbolic_operand (x))
3698 x = legitimize_tls_address (x);
3699 else if (flag_pic)
3700 x = legitimize_pic_address (x, mode, 0);
3701 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
3702 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0),
3703 copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (x, 1)));
3704 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
3705 x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 1),
3706 copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0)));
3707 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SYMBOL_REF
3708 || GET_CODE (x) == CONST
3709 || GET_CODE (x) == LABEL_REF)
3710 x = copy_to_suggested_reg (x, NULL_RTX, Pmode);
3711 return x;
3714 /* Emit special PIC prologues. */
3716 void
3717 load_pic_register (void)
3719 /* Labels to get the PC in the prologue of this function. */
3720 int orig_flag_pic = flag_pic;
3722 if (! flag_pic)
3723 abort ();
3725 /* If we haven't emitted the special get_pc helper function, do so now. */
3726 if (get_pc_symbol_name[0] == 0)
3728 int align;
3730 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (get_pc_symbol_name, "LGETPC", 0);
3731 text_section ();
3733 align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
3734 if (align > 0)
3735 ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align);
3736 (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "LGETPC", 0);
3737 fputs ("\tretl\n\tadd\t%o7, %l7, %l7\n", asm_out_file);
3740 /* Initialize every time through, since we can't easily
3741 know this to be permanent. */
3742 global_offset_table = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_");
3743 get_pc_symbol = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, get_pc_symbol_name);
3744 flag_pic = 0;
3746 emit_insn (gen_get_pc (pic_offset_table_rtx, global_offset_table,
3747 get_pc_symbol));
3749 flag_pic = orig_flag_pic;
3751 /* Need to emit this whether or not we obey regdecls,
3752 since setjmp/longjmp can cause life info to screw up.
3753 ??? In the case where we don't obey regdecls, this is not sufficient
3754 since we may not fall out the bottom. */
3755 emit_insn (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, pic_offset_table_rtx));
3758 /* Return 1 if RTX is a MEM which is known to be aligned to at
3759 least a DESIRED byte boundary. */
3762 mem_min_alignment (rtx mem, int desired)
3764 rtx addr, base, offset;
3766 /* If it's not a MEM we can't accept it. */
3767 if (GET_CODE (mem) != MEM)
3768 return 0;
3770 addr = XEXP (mem, 0);
3771 base = offset = NULL_RTX;
3772 if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
3774 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG)
3776 base = XEXP (addr, 0);
3778 /* What we are saying here is that if the base
3779 REG is aligned properly, the compiler will make
3780 sure any REG based index upon it will be so
3781 as well. */
3782 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
3783 offset = XEXP (addr, 1);
3784 else
3785 offset = const0_rtx;
3788 else if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG)
3790 base = addr;
3791 offset = const0_rtx;
3794 if (base != NULL_RTX)
3796 int regno = REGNO (base);
3798 if (regno != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
3800 /* Check if the compiler has recorded some information
3801 about the alignment of the base REG. If reload has
3802 completed, we already matched with proper alignments.
3803 If not running global_alloc, reload might give us
3804 unaligned pointer to local stack though. */
3805 if (((cfun != 0
3806 && REGNO_POINTER_ALIGN (regno) >= desired * BITS_PER_UNIT)
3807 || (optimize && reload_completed))
3808 && (INTVAL (offset) & (desired - 1)) == 0)
3809 return 1;
3811 else
3813 if (((INTVAL (offset) - SPARC_STACK_BIAS) & (desired - 1)) == 0)
3814 return 1;
3817 else if (! TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES
3818 || CONSTANT_P (addr)
3819 || GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
3821 /* Anything else we know is properly aligned unless TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES
3822 is true, in which case we can only assume that an access is aligned if
3823 it is to a constant address, or the address involves a LO_SUM. */
3824 return 1;
3827 /* An obviously unaligned address. */
3828 return 0;
3832 /* Vectors to keep interesting information about registers where it can easily
3833 be got. We used to use the actual mode value as the bit number, but there
3834 are more than 32 modes now. Instead we use two tables: one indexed by
3835 hard register number, and one indexed by mode. */
3837 /* The purpose of sparc_mode_class is to shrink the range of modes so that
3838 they all fit (as bit numbers) in a 32 bit word (again). Each real mode is
3839 mapped into one sparc_mode_class mode. */
3841 enum sparc_mode_class {
3842 S_MODE, D_MODE, T_MODE, O_MODE,
3843 SF_MODE, DF_MODE, TF_MODE, OF_MODE,
3844 CC_MODE, CCFP_MODE
3847 /* Modes for single-word and smaller quantities. */
3848 #define S_MODES ((1 << (int) S_MODE) | (1 << (int) SF_MODE))
3850 /* Modes for double-word and smaller quantities. */
3851 #define D_MODES (S_MODES | (1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << DF_MODE))
3853 /* Modes for quad-word and smaller quantities. */
3854 #define T_MODES (D_MODES | (1 << (int) T_MODE) | (1 << (int) TF_MODE))
3856 /* Modes for 8-word and smaller quantities. */
3857 #define O_MODES (T_MODES | (1 << (int) O_MODE) | (1 << (int) OF_MODE))
3859 /* Modes for single-float quantities. We must allow any single word or
3860 smaller quantity. This is because the fix/float conversion instructions
3861 take integer inputs/outputs from the float registers. */
3862 #define SF_MODES (S_MODES)
3864 /* Modes for double-float and smaller quantities. */
3865 #define DF_MODES (S_MODES | D_MODES)
3867 /* Modes for double-float only quantities. */
3868 #define DF_MODES_NO_S ((1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << (int) DF_MODE))
3870 /* Modes for quad-float only quantities. */
3871 #define TF_ONLY_MODES (1 << (int) TF_MODE)
3873 /* Modes for quad-float and smaller quantities. */
3874 #define TF_MODES (DF_MODES | TF_ONLY_MODES)
3876 /* Modes for quad-float and double-float quantities. */
3877 #define TF_MODES_NO_S (DF_MODES_NO_S | TF_ONLY_MODES)
3879 /* Modes for quad-float pair only quantities. */
3880 #define OF_ONLY_MODES (1 << (int) OF_MODE)
3882 /* Modes for quad-float pairs and smaller quantities. */
3883 #define OF_MODES (TF_MODES | OF_ONLY_MODES)
3885 #define OF_MODES_NO_S (TF_MODES_NO_S | OF_ONLY_MODES)
3887 /* Modes for condition codes. */
3888 #define CC_MODES (1 << (int) CC_MODE)
3889 #define CCFP_MODES (1 << (int) CCFP_MODE)
3891 /* Value is 1 if register/mode pair is acceptable on sparc.
3892 The funny mixture of D and T modes is because integer operations
3893 do not specially operate on tetra quantities, so non-quad-aligned
3894 registers can hold quadword quantities (except %o4 and %i4 because
3895 they cross fixed registers). */
3897 /* This points to either the 32 bit or the 64 bit version. */
3898 const int *hard_regno_mode_classes;
3900 static const int hard_32bit_mode_classes[] = {
3901 S_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3902 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3903 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3904 T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
3906 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3907 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3908 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3909 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3911 /* FP regs f32 to f63. Only the even numbered registers actually exist,
3912 and none can hold SFmode/SImode values. */
3913 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3914 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3915 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3916 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3918 /* %fcc[0123] */
3919 CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES,
3921 /* %icc */
3922 CC_MODES
3925 static const int hard_64bit_mode_classes[] = {
3926 D_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3927 O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3928 T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3929 O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
3931 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3932 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3933 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3934 OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
3936 /* FP regs f32 to f63. Only the even numbered registers actually exist,
3937 and none can hold SFmode/SImode values. */
3938 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3939 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3940 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3941 OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
3943 /* %fcc[0123] */
3944 CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES,
3946 /* %icc */
3947 CC_MODES
3950 int sparc_mode_class [NUM_MACHINE_MODES];
3952 enum reg_class sparc_regno_reg_class[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER];
3954 static void
3955 sparc_init_modes (void)
3957 int i;
3959 for (i = 0; i < NUM_MACHINE_MODES; i++)
3961 switch (GET_MODE_CLASS (i))
3963 case MODE_INT:
3964 case MODE_PARTIAL_INT:
3965 case MODE_COMPLEX_INT:
3966 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4)
3967 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) S_MODE;
3968 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8)
3969 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) D_MODE;
3970 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16)
3971 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) T_MODE;
3972 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32)
3973 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) O_MODE;
3974 else
3975 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
3976 break;
3977 case MODE_FLOAT:
3978 case MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT:
3979 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4)
3980 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) SF_MODE;
3981 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8)
3982 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) DF_MODE;
3983 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16)
3984 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) TF_MODE;
3985 else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32)
3986 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) OF_MODE;
3987 else
3988 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
3989 break;
3990 case MODE_CC:
3991 if (i == (int) CCFPmode || i == (int) CCFPEmode)
3992 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CCFP_MODE;
3993 else
3994 sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CC_MODE;
3995 break;
3996 default:
3997 sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
3998 break;
4002 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
4003 hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_64bit_mode_classes;
4004 else
4005 hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_32bit_mode_classes;
4007 /* Initialize the array used by REGNO_REG_CLASS. */
4008 for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
4010 if (i < 16 && TARGET_V8PLUS)
4011 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = I64_REGS;
4012 else if (i < 32 || i == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
4013 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = GENERAL_REGS;
4014 else if (i < 64)
4015 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FP_REGS;
4016 else if (i < 96)
4017 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = EXTRA_FP_REGS;
4018 else if (i < 100)
4019 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FPCC_REGS;
4020 else
4021 sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = NO_REGS;
4025 /* Save non call used registers from LOW to HIGH at BASE+OFFSET.
4026 N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. This applies even to
4027 v9 int regs as it simplifies the code. */
4029 static int
4030 save_regs (FILE *file, int low, int high, const char *base,
4031 int offset, int n_regs, HOST_WIDE_INT real_offset)
4033 int i;
4035 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && high <= 32)
4037 for (i = low; i < high; i++)
4039 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
4041 fprintf (file, "\tstx\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
4042 reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
4043 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
4044 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
4045 n_regs += 2;
4049 else
4051 for (i = low; i < high; i += 2)
4053 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
4055 if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
4057 fprintf (file, "\tstd\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
4058 reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
4059 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
4061 char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
4062 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
4063 dwarf2out_reg_save (l, i+1, real_offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
4065 n_regs += 2;
4067 else
4069 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
4070 reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
4071 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
4072 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
4073 n_regs += 2;
4076 else
4078 if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
4080 fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
4081 reg_names[i+1], base, offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
4082 if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
4083 dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i + 1, real_offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
4084 n_regs += 2;
4089 return n_regs;
4092 /* Restore non call used registers from LOW to HIGH at BASE+OFFSET.
4094 N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. This applies even to
4095 v9 int regs as it simplifies the code. */
4097 static int
4098 restore_regs (FILE *file, int low, int high, const char *base,
4099 int offset, int n_regs)
4101 int i;
4103 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && high <= 32)
4105 for (i = low; i < high; i++)
4107 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
4108 fprintf (file, "\tldx\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
4109 base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
4110 n_regs += 2;
4113 else
4115 for (i = low; i < high; i += 2)
4117 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
4118 if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
4119 fprintf (file, "\tldd\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
4120 base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
4121 n_regs += 2;
4122 else
4123 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
4124 base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
4125 n_regs += 2;
4126 else if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
4127 fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
4128 base, offset + 4 * n_regs + 4, reg_names[i+1]),
4129 n_regs += 2;
4132 return n_regs;
4135 /* Compute the frame size required by the function. This function is called
4136 during the reload pass and also by output_function_prologue(). */
4138 HOST_WIDE_INT
4139 compute_frame_size (HOST_WIDE_INT size, int leaf_function)
4141 int n_regs = 0, i;
4142 int outgoing_args_size = (current_function_outgoing_args_size
4143 + REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (current_function_decl));
4145 /* N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far. This applies
4146 even to v9 int regs to be consistent with save_regs/restore_regs. */
4148 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
4150 for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
4151 if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
4152 n_regs += 2;
4154 else
4156 for (i = 0; i < 8; i += 2)
4157 if ((regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
4158 || (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1]))
4159 n_regs += 2;
4162 for (i = 32; i < (TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64); i += 2)
4163 if ((regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
4164 || (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1]))
4165 n_regs += 2;
4167 /* Set up values for use in `function_epilogue'. */
4168 num_gfregs = n_regs;
4170 if (leaf_function && n_regs == 0
4171 && size == 0 && current_function_outgoing_args_size == 0)
4173 actual_fsize = apparent_fsize = 0;
4175 else
4177 /* We subtract STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET, remember it's negative. */
4178 apparent_fsize = (size - STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET + 7) & -8;
4179 apparent_fsize += n_regs * 4;
4180 actual_fsize = apparent_fsize + ((outgoing_args_size + 7) & -8);
4183 /* Make sure nothing can clobber our register windows.
4184 If a SAVE must be done, or there is a stack-local variable,
4185 the register window area must be allocated.
4186 ??? For v8 we apparently need an additional 8 bytes of reserved space. */
4187 if (leaf_function == 0 || size > 0)
4188 actual_fsize += (16 * UNITS_PER_WORD) + (TARGET_ARCH64 ? 0 : 8);
4190 return SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (actual_fsize);
4193 /* Build big number NUM in register REG and output the result to FILE.
4194 REG is guaranteed to be the only clobbered register. The function
4195 will very likely emit several instructions, so it must not be called
4196 from within a delay slot. */
4198 static void
4199 build_big_number (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT num, const char *reg)
4201 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
4202 HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits = (num >> 32) & 0xffffffff;
4204 if (high_bits == 0
4205 #else
4206 if (num >= 0
4207 #endif
4208 || ! TARGET_ARCH64)
4210 /* We don't use the 'set' macro because it appears to be broken
4211 in the Solaris 7 assembler. */
4212 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi("HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC"), %s\n",
4213 num, reg);
4214 if ((num & 0x3ff) != 0)
4215 fprintf (file, "\tor\t%s, %%lo("HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC"), %s\n",
4216 reg, num, reg);
4218 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
4219 else if (high_bits == 0xffffffff) /* && TARGET_ARCH64 */
4220 #else
4221 else /* num < 0 && TARGET_ARCH64 */
4222 #endif
4224 /* Sethi does not sign extend, so we must use a little trickery
4225 to use it for negative numbers. Invert the constant before
4226 loading it in, then use xor immediate to invert the loaded bits
4227 (along with the upper 32 bits) to the desired constant. This
4228 works because the sethi and immediate fields overlap. */
4229 HOST_WIDE_INT inv = ~num;
4230 HOST_WIDE_INT low = -0x400 + (num & 0x3ff);
4232 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi("HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC"), %s\n",
4233 inv, reg);
4234 fprintf (file, "\txor\t%s, "HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %s\n",
4235 reg, low, reg);
4237 #if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
4238 else /* TARGET_ARCH64 */
4240 /* We don't use the 'setx' macro because if requires a scratch register.
4241 This is the translation of sparc_emit_set_const64_longway into asm.
4242 Hopefully we will soon have prologue/epilogue emitted as RTL. */
4243 HOST_WIDE_INT low1 = (num >> (32 - 12)) & 0xfff;
4244 HOST_WIDE_INT low2 = (num >> (32 - 12 - 12)) & 0xfff;
4245 HOST_WIDE_INT low3 = (num >> (32 - 12 - 12 - 8)) & 0x0ff;
4246 int to_shift = 12;
4248 /* We don't use the 'set' macro because it appears to be broken
4249 in the Solaris 7 assembler. */
4250 fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi("HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC"), %s\n",
4251 high_bits, reg);
4252 if ((high_bits & 0x3ff) != 0)
4253 fprintf (file, "\tor\t%s, %%lo("HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC"), %s\n",
4254 reg, high_bits, reg);
4256 if (low1 != 0)
4258 fprintf (file, "\tsllx\t%s, %d, %s\n", reg, to_shift, reg);
4259 fprintf (file, "\tor\t%s, "HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %s\n",
4260 reg, low1, reg);
4261 to_shift = 12;
4263 else
4265 to_shift += 12;
4267 if (low2 != 0)
4269 fprintf (file, "\tsllx\t%s, %d, %s\n", reg, to_shift, reg);
4270 fprintf (file, "\tor\t%s, "HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %s\n",
4271 reg, low2, reg);
4272 to_shift = 8;
4274 else
4276 to_shift += 8;
4278 fprintf (file, "\tsllx\t%s, %d, %s\n", reg, to_shift, reg);
4279 if (low3 != 0)
4280 fprintf (file, "\tor\t%s, "HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %s\n",
4281 reg, low3, reg);
4283 #endif
4286 /* Output any necessary .register pseudo-ops. */
4287 void
4288 sparc_output_scratch_registers (FILE *file ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
4290 #ifdef HAVE_AS_REGISTER_PSEUDO_OP
4291 int i;
4293 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
4294 return;
4296 /* Check if %g[2367] were used without
4297 .register being printed for them already. */
4298 for (i = 2; i < 8; i++)
4300 if (regs_ever_live [i]
4301 && ! sparc_hard_reg_printed [i])
4303 sparc_hard_reg_printed [i] = 1;
4304 fprintf (file, "\t.register\t%%g%d, #scratch\n", i);
4306 if (i == 3) i = 5;
4308 #endif
4311 /* This function generates the assembly code for function entry.
4312 FILE is a stdio stream to output the code to.
4313 SIZE is an int: how many units of temporary storage to allocate.
4314 Refer to the array `regs_ever_live' to determine which registers
4315 to save; `regs_ever_live[I]' is nonzero if register number I
4316 is ever used in the function. This macro is responsible for
4317 knowing which registers should not be saved even if used. */
4319 /* On SPARC, move-double insns between fpu and cpu need an 8-byte block
4320 of memory. If any fpu reg is used in the function, we allocate
4321 such a block here, at the bottom of the frame, just in case it's needed.
4323 If this function is a leaf procedure, then we may choose not
4324 to do a "save" insn. The decision about whether or not
4325 to do this is made in regclass.c. */
4327 static void
4328 sparc_output_function_prologue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size)
4330 sparc_function_prologue (file, size,
4331 current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs);
4334 /* Output code for the function prologue. */
4336 static void
4337 sparc_function_prologue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size, int leaf_function)
4339 sparc_output_scratch_registers (file);
4341 /* Need to use actual_fsize, since we are also allocating
4342 space for our callee (and our own register save area). */
4343 actual_fsize = compute_frame_size (size, leaf_function);
4345 if (leaf_function)
4347 frame_base_name = "%sp";
4348 frame_base_offset = actual_fsize + SPARC_STACK_BIAS;
4350 else
4352 frame_base_name = "%fp";
4353 frame_base_offset = SPARC_STACK_BIAS;
4356 /* This is only for the human reader. */
4357 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 0\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
4359 if (actual_fsize == 0)
4360 /* do nothing. */ ;
4361 else if (! leaf_function)
4363 if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
4364 fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, -"HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %%sp\n",
4365 actual_fsize);
4366 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
4368 fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n");
4369 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -"HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %%sp\n",
4370 actual_fsize - 4096);
4372 else
4374 build_big_number (file, -actual_fsize, "%g1");
4375 fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n");
4378 else /* leaf function */
4380 if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
4381 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -"HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %%sp\n",
4382 actual_fsize);
4383 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
4385 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n");
4386 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -"HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %%sp\n",
4387 actual_fsize - 4096);
4389 else
4391 build_big_number (file, -actual_fsize, "%g1");
4392 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n");
4396 if (dwarf2out_do_frame () && actual_fsize)
4398 char *label = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
4400 /* The canonical frame address refers to the top of the frame. */
4401 dwarf2out_def_cfa (label, (leaf_function ? STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
4402 : HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM),
4403 frame_base_offset);
4405 if (! leaf_function)
4407 /* Note the register window save. This tells the unwinder that
4408 it needs to restore the window registers from the previous
4409 frame's window save area at 0(cfa). */
4410 dwarf2out_window_save (label);
4412 /* The return address (-8) is now in %i7. */
4413 dwarf2out_return_reg (label, 31);
4417 /* If doing anything with PIC, do it now. */
4418 if (! flag_pic)
4419 fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 1\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
4421 /* Call saved registers are saved just above the outgoing argument area. */
4422 if (num_gfregs)
4424 HOST_WIDE_INT offset, real_offset;
4425 int n_regs;
4426 const char *base;
4428 real_offset = -apparent_fsize;
4429 offset = -apparent_fsize + frame_base_offset;
4430 if (offset < -4096 || offset + num_gfregs * 4 > 4096)
4432 /* ??? This might be optimized a little as %g1 might already have a
4433 value close enough that a single add insn will do. */
4434 /* ??? Although, all of this is probably only a temporary fix
4435 because if %g1 can hold a function result, then
4436 output_function_epilogue will lose (the result will get
4437 clobbered). */
4438 build_big_number (file, offset, "%g1");
4439 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %%g1, %%g1\n", frame_base_name);
4440 base = "%g1";
4441 offset = 0;
4443 else
4445 base = frame_base_name;
4448 n_regs = save_regs (file, 0, 8, base, offset, 0, real_offset);
4449 save_regs (file, 32, TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64, base, offset, n_regs,
4450 real_offset);
4454 /* Output code to restore any call saved registers. */
4456 static void
4457 output_restore_regs (FILE *file, int leaf_function ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
4459 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
4460 int n_regs;
4461 const char *base;
4463 offset = -apparent_fsize + frame_base_offset;
4464 if (offset < -4096 || offset + num_gfregs * 4 > 4096 - 8 /*double*/)
4466 build_big_number (file, offset, "%g1");
4467 fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %%g1, %%g1\n", frame_base_name);
4468 base = "%g1";
4469 offset = 0;
4471 else
4473 base = frame_base_name;
4476 n_regs = restore_regs (file, 0, 8, base, offset, 0);
4477 restore_regs (file, 32, TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64, base, offset, n_regs);
4480 /* This function generates the assembly code for function exit,
4481 on machines that need it.
4483 The function epilogue should not depend on the current stack pointer!
4484 It should use the frame pointer only. This is mandatory because
4485 of alloca; we also take advantage of it to omit stack adjustments
4486 before returning. */
4488 static void
4489 sparc_output_function_epilogue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size)
4491 sparc_function_epilogue (file, size,
4492 current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs);
4495 /* Output code for the function epilogue. */
4497 static void
4498 sparc_function_epilogue (FILE *file,
4499 HOST_WIDE_INT size ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
4500 int leaf_function)
4502 const char *ret;
4504 if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list == 0)
4506 /* If code does not drop into the epilogue, we need
4507 do nothing except output pending case vectors.
4509 We have to still output a dummy nop for the sake of
4510 sane backtraces. Otherwise, if the last two instructions
4511 of a function were call foo; dslot; this can make the return
4512 PC of foo (ie. address of call instruction plus 8) point to
4513 the first instruction in the next function. */
4514 rtx insn, last_real_insn;
4516 insn = get_last_insn ();
4518 last_real_insn = prev_real_insn (insn);
4519 if (last_real_insn
4520 && GET_CODE (last_real_insn) == INSN
4521 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (last_real_insn)) == SEQUENCE)
4522 last_real_insn = XVECEXP (PATTERN (last_real_insn), 0, 0);
4524 if (last_real_insn && GET_CODE (last_real_insn) == CALL_INSN)
4525 fputs("\tnop\n", file);
4527 if (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE)
4528 insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
4529 if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == BARRIER)
4530 goto output_vectors;
4533 if (num_gfregs)
4534 output_restore_regs (file, leaf_function);
4536 /* Work out how to skip the caller's unimp instruction if required. */
4537 if (leaf_function)
4538 ret = (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P ? "jmp\t%o7+12" : "retl");
4539 else
4540 ret = (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P ? "jmp\t%i7+12" : "ret");
4542 if (! leaf_function)
4544 if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
4546 if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
4547 abort ();
4548 if (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P)
4549 abort ();
4551 fputs ("\trestore\n\tretl\n\tadd\t%sp, %g1, %sp\n", file);
4553 /* If we wound up with things in our delay slot, flush them here. */
4554 else if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
4556 rtx delay = PATTERN (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0));
4558 if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&delay, 1))
4560 epilogue_renumber (&delay, 0);
4561 fputs (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P
4562 ? "\treturn\t%i7+12\n"
4563 : "\treturn\t%i7+8\n", file);
4564 final_scan_insn (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0),
4565 file, 1, 0, 0, NULL);
4567 else
4569 rtx insn, src;
4571 if (GET_CODE (delay) != SET)
4572 abort();
4574 src = SET_SRC (delay);
4575 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT)
4577 if (XEXP (src, 1) != const1_rtx)
4578 abort();
4579 SET_SRC (delay)
4580 = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (src), XEXP (src, 0),
4581 XEXP (src, 0));
4584 insn = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
4585 gen_rtvec (2, delay,
4586 gen_rtx_RETURN (VOIDmode)));
4587 insn = emit_jump_insn (insn);
4589 sparc_emitting_epilogue = true;
4590 final_scan_insn (insn, file, 1, 0, 1, NULL);
4591 sparc_emitting_epilogue = false;
4594 else if (TARGET_V9 && ! SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P)
4595 fputs ("\treturn\t%i7+8\n\tnop\n", file);
4596 else
4597 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\trestore\n", ret);
4599 /* All of the following cases are for leaf functions. */
4600 else if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
4601 abort ();
4602 else if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
4604 /* eligible_for_epilogue_delay_slot ensures that if this is a
4605 leaf function, then we will only have insn in the delay slot
4606 if the frame size is zero, thus no adjust for the stack is
4607 needed here. */
4608 if (actual_fsize != 0)
4609 abort ();
4610 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n", ret);
4611 final_scan_insn (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0),
4612 file, 1, 0, 1, NULL);
4614 /* Output 'nop' instead of 'sub %sp,-0,%sp' when no frame, so as to
4615 avoid generating confusing assembly language output. */
4616 else if (actual_fsize == 0)
4617 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\tnop\n", ret);
4618 else if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
4619 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\tsub\t%%sp, -"HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %%sp\n",
4620 ret, actual_fsize);
4621 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
4622 fprintf (file, "\tsub\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n\t%s\n\tsub\t%%sp, -"HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %%sp\n",
4623 ret, actual_fsize - 4096);
4624 else
4626 build_big_number (file, actual_fsize, "%g1");
4627 fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n", ret);
4630 output_vectors:
4631 sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors ();
4634 /* Output a sibling call. */
4636 const char *
4637 output_sibcall (rtx insn, rtx call_operand)
4639 int leaf_regs = current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs;
4640 rtx operands[3];
4641 int delay_slot = dbr_sequence_length () > 0;
4643 if (num_gfregs)
4645 /* Call to restore global regs might clobber
4646 the delay slot. Instead of checking for this
4647 output the delay slot now. */
4648 if (delay_slot)
4650 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn);
4652 if (! delay)
4653 abort ();
4655 final_scan_insn (delay, asm_out_file, 1, 0, 1, NULL);
4656 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
4657 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
4658 delay_slot = 0;
4660 output_restore_regs (asm_out_file, leaf_regs);
4663 operands[0] = call_operand;
4665 if (leaf_regs)
4667 #ifdef HAVE_AS_RELAX_OPTION
4668 /* If as and ld are relaxing tail call insns into branch always,
4669 use or %o7,%g0,X; call Y; or X,%g0,%o7 always, so that it can
4670 be optimized. With sethi/jmpl as nor ld has no easy way how to
4671 find out if somebody does not branch between the sethi and jmpl. */
4672 int spare_slot = 0;
4673 #else
4674 int spare_slot = ((TARGET_ARCH32 || TARGET_CM_MEDLOW) && ! flag_pic);
4675 #endif
4676 HOST_WIDE_INT size = 0;
4678 if ((actual_fsize || ! spare_slot) && delay_slot)
4680 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn);
4682 if (! delay)
4683 abort ();
4685 final_scan_insn (delay, asm_out_file, 1, 0, 1, NULL);
4686 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
4687 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
4688 delay_slot = 0;
4690 if (actual_fsize)
4692 if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
4693 size = actual_fsize;
4694 else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
4696 fputs ("\tsub\t%sp, -4096, %sp\n", asm_out_file);
4697 size = actual_fsize - 4096;
4699 else
4701 build_big_number (asm_out_file, actual_fsize, "%g1");
4702 fputs ("\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n", asm_out_file);
4705 if (spare_slot)
4707 output_asm_insn ("sethi\t%%hi(%a0), %%g1", operands);
4708 output_asm_insn ("jmpl\t%%g1 + %%lo(%a0), %%g0", operands);
4709 if (size)
4710 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t sub\t%%sp, -"HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %%sp\n", size);
4711 else if (! delay_slot)
4712 fputs ("\t nop\n", asm_out_file);
4714 else
4716 if (size)
4717 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\tsub\t%%sp, -"HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC", %%sp\n", size);
4718 /* Use or with rs2 %%g0 instead of mov, so that as/ld can optimize
4719 it into branch if possible. */
4720 output_asm_insn ("or\t%%o7, %%g0, %%g1", operands);
4721 output_asm_insn ("call\t%a0, 0", operands);
4722 output_asm_insn (" or\t%%g1, %%g0, %%o7", operands);
4724 return "";
4727 output_asm_insn ("call\t%a0, 0", operands);
4728 if (delay_slot)
4730 rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn), pat;
4732 if (! delay)
4733 abort ();
4735 pat = PATTERN (delay);
4736 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET)
4737 abort ();
4739 operands[0] = SET_DEST (pat);
4740 pat = SET_SRC (pat);
4741 switch (GET_CODE (pat))
4743 case PLUS:
4744 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
4745 operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1);
4746 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %2, %Y0", operands);
4747 break;
4748 case LO_SUM:
4749 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
4750 operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1);
4751 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %%lo(%a2), %Y0", operands);
4752 break;
4753 case ASHIFT:
4754 operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
4755 output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %r1, %Y0", operands);
4756 break;
4757 default:
4758 operands[1] = pat;
4759 output_asm_insn (" restore %%g0, %1, %Y0", operands);
4760 break;
4762 PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
4763 INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
4765 else
4766 fputs ("\t restore\n", asm_out_file);
4767 return "";
4770 /* Functions for handling argument passing.
4772 For v8 the first six args are normally in registers and the rest are
4773 pushed. Any arg that starts within the first 6 words is at least
4774 partially passed in a register unless its data type forbids.
4776 For v9, the argument registers are laid out as an array of 16 elements
4777 and arguments are added sequentially. The first 6 int args and up to the
4778 first 16 fp args (depending on size) are passed in regs.
4780 Slot Stack Integral Float Float in structure Double Long Double
4781 ---- ----- -------- ----- ------------------ ------ -----------
4782 15 [SP+248] %f31 %f30,%f31 %d30
4783 14 [SP+240] %f29 %f28,%f29 %d28 %q28
4784 13 [SP+232] %f27 %f26,%f27 %d26
4785 12 [SP+224] %f25 %f24,%f25 %d24 %q24
4786 11 [SP+216] %f23 %f22,%f23 %d22
4787 10 [SP+208] %f21 %f20,%f21 %d20 %q20
4788 9 [SP+200] %f19 %f18,%f19 %d18
4789 8 [SP+192] %f17 %f16,%f17 %d16 %q16
4790 7 [SP+184] %f15 %f14,%f15 %d14
4791 6 [SP+176] %f13 %f12,%f13 %d12 %q12
4792 5 [SP+168] %o5 %f11 %f10,%f11 %d10
4793 4 [SP+160] %o4 %f9 %f8,%f9 %d8 %q8
4794 3 [SP+152] %o3 %f7 %f6,%f7 %d6
4795 2 [SP+144] %o2 %f5 %f4,%f5 %d4 %q4
4796 1 [SP+136] %o1 %f3 %f2,%f3 %d2
4797 0 [SP+128] %o0 %f1 %f0,%f1 %d0 %q0
4799 Here SP = %sp if -mno-stack-bias or %sp+stack_bias otherwise.
4801 Integral arguments are always passed as 64 bit quantities appropriately
4802 extended.
4804 Passing of floating point values is handled as follows.
4805 If a prototype is in scope:
4806 If the value is in a named argument (i.e. not a stdarg function or a
4807 value not part of the `...') then the value is passed in the appropriate
4808 fp reg.
4809 If the value is part of the `...' and is passed in one of the first 6
4810 slots then the value is passed in the appropriate int reg.
4811 If the value is part of the `...' and is not passed in one of the first 6
4812 slots then the value is passed in memory.
4813 If a prototype is not in scope:
4814 If the value is one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in the
4815 appropriate integer reg and the appropriate fp reg.
4816 If the value is not one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in
4817 the appropriate fp reg and in memory.
4820 /* Maximum number of int regs for args. */
4821 #define SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX 6
4822 /* Maximum number of fp regs for args. */
4823 #define SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX 16
4825 #define ROUND_ADVANCE(SIZE) (((SIZE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
4827 /* Handle the INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS macro.
4828 Initialize a variable CUM of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS
4829 for a call to a function whose data type is FNTYPE.
4830 For a library call, FNTYPE is 0. */
4832 void
4833 init_cumulative_args (struct sparc_args *cum, tree fntype,
4834 rtx libname ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
4835 tree fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
4837 cum->words = 0;
4838 cum->prototype_p = fntype && TYPE_ARG_TYPES (fntype);
4839 cum->libcall_p = fntype == 0;
4842 /* Handle the TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES target hook.
4843 When a prototype says `char' or `short', really pass an `int'. */
4845 static bool
4846 sparc_promote_prototypes (tree fntype ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
4848 return TARGET_ARCH32 ? true : false;
4851 /* Handle the TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING target hook. */
4853 static bool
4854 sparc_strict_argument_naming (CUMULATIVE_ARGS *ca ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
4856 /* For the V9 we want NAMED to mean what it says it means. */
4857 return TARGET_V9 ? true : false;
4860 /* Handle the TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY target hook.
4861 Specify whether to return the return value in memory. */
4863 static bool
4864 sparc_return_in_memory (tree type, tree fntype ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
4866 /* SPARC ABI says that quad-precision floats and all structures are
4867 returned in memory.
4868 For V9: unions <= 32 bytes in size are returned in int regs,
4869 structures up to 32 bytes are returned in int and fp regs. */
4870 return (TARGET_ARCH32
4871 ? (TYPE_MODE (type) == BLKmode
4872 || TYPE_MODE (type) == TFmode)
4873 : (TYPE_MODE (type) == BLKmode
4874 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) int_size_in_bytes (type) > 32));
4877 /* Handle the TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE target hook.
4878 Return where to find the structure return value address. */
4880 static rtx
4881 sparc_struct_value_rtx (tree fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, int incoming)
4883 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
4884 return 0;
4885 else
4887 if (incoming)
4888 return gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, plus_constant (frame_pointer_rtx,
4889 STRUCT_VALUE_OFFSET));
4890 else
4891 return gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, plus_constant (stack_pointer_rtx,
4892 STRUCT_VALUE_OFFSET));
4896 /* Scan the record type TYPE and return the following predicates:
4897 - INTREGS_P: the record contains at least one field or sub-field
4898 that is eligible for promotion in integer registers.
4899 - FP_REGS_P: the record contains at least one field or sub-field
4900 that is eligible for promotion in floating-point registers.
4901 - PACKED_P: the record contains at least one field that is packed.
4903 Sub-fields are not taken into account for the PACKED_P predicate. */
4905 static void
4906 scan_record_type (tree type, int *intregs_p, int *fpregs_p, int *packed_p)
4908 tree field;
4910 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
4912 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
4914 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE)
4915 scan_record_type (TREE_TYPE (field), intregs_p, fpregs_p, 0);
4916 else if (FLOAT_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (field)) && TARGET_FPU)
4917 *fpregs_p = 1;
4918 else
4919 *intregs_p = 1;
4921 if (packed_p && DECL_PACKED (field))
4922 *packed_p = 1;
4927 /* Compute the slot number to pass an argument in.
4928 Return the slot number or -1 if passing on the stack.
4930 CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about
4931 the preceding args and about the function being called.
4932 MODE is the argument's machine mode.
4933 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
4934 This is null for libcalls where that information may
4935 not be available.
4936 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
4937 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
4938 INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG.
4939 *PREGNO records the register number to use if scalar type.
4940 *PPADDING records the amount of padding needed in words. */
4942 static int
4943 function_arg_slotno (const struct sparc_args *cum, enum machine_mode mode,
4944 tree type, int named, int incoming_p,
4945 int *pregno, int *ppadding)
4947 int regbase = (incoming_p
4948 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST
4949 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
4950 int slotno = cum->words;
4951 int regno;
4953 *ppadding = 0;
4955 if (type != 0 && TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type))
4956 return -1;
4957 if (TARGET_ARCH32
4958 && type != 0 && mode == BLKmode
4959 && TYPE_ALIGN (type) % PARM_BOUNDARY != 0)
4960 return -1;
4962 switch (mode)
4964 case VOIDmode :
4965 /* MODE is VOIDmode when generating the actual call.
4966 See emit_call_1. */
4967 return -1;
4969 case TImode : case CTImode :
4970 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && (slotno & 1) != 0)
4971 slotno++, *ppadding = 1;
4972 /* fallthrough */
4974 case QImode : case CQImode :
4975 case HImode : case CHImode :
4976 case SImode : case CSImode :
4977 case DImode : case CDImode :
4978 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4979 return -1;
4980 regno = regbase + slotno;
4981 break;
4983 case TFmode : case TCmode :
4984 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && (slotno & 1) != 0)
4985 slotno++, *ppadding = 1;
4986 /* fallthrough */
4988 case SFmode : case SCmode :
4989 case DFmode : case DCmode :
4990 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
4992 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
4993 return -1;
4994 regno = regbase + slotno;
4996 else
4998 if (TARGET_FPU && named)
5000 if (slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
5001 return -1;
5002 regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + slotno * 2;
5003 if (mode == SFmode)
5004 regno++;
5006 else
5008 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
5009 return -1;
5010 regno = regbase + slotno;
5013 break;
5015 case BLKmode :
5016 /* For sparc64, objects requiring 16 byte alignment get it. */
5017 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
5019 if (type && TYPE_ALIGN (type) == 128 && (slotno & 1) != 0)
5020 slotno++, *ppadding = 1;
5023 if (TARGET_ARCH32
5024 || (type && TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE))
5026 if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
5027 return -1;
5028 regno = regbase + slotno;
5030 else
5032 int intregs_p = 0, fpregs_p = 0, packed_p = 0;
5034 /* First see what kinds of registers we would need. */
5035 scan_record_type (type, &intregs_p, &fpregs_p, &packed_p);
5037 /* The ABI obviously doesn't specify how packed structures
5038 are passed. These are defined to be passed in int regs
5039 if possible, otherwise memory. */
5040 if (packed_p || !named)
5041 fpregs_p = 0, intregs_p = 1;
5043 /* If all arg slots are filled, then must pass on stack. */
5044 if (fpregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
5045 return -1;
5046 /* If there are only int args and all int arg slots are filled,
5047 then must pass on stack. */
5048 if (!fpregs_p && intregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
5049 return -1;
5050 /* Note that even if all int arg slots are filled, fp members may
5051 still be passed in regs if such regs are available.
5052 *PREGNO isn't set because there may be more than one, it's up
5053 to the caller to compute them. */
5054 return slotno;
5056 break;
5058 default :
5059 abort ();
5062 *pregno = regno;
5063 return slotno;
5066 /* Handle recursive register counting for structure field layout. */
5068 struct function_arg_record_value_parms
5070 rtx ret; /* return expression being built. */
5071 int slotno; /* slot number of the argument. */
5072 int named; /* whether the argument is named. */
5073 int regbase; /* regno of the base register. */
5074 int stack; /* 1 if part of the argument is on the stack. */
5075 int intoffset; /* offset of the first pending integer field. */
5076 unsigned int nregs; /* number of words passed in registers. */
5079 static void function_arg_record_value_3
5080 (HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *);
5081 static void function_arg_record_value_2
5082 (tree, HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *, bool);
5083 static void function_arg_record_value_1
5084 (tree, HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *, bool);
5085 static rtx function_arg_record_value (tree, enum machine_mode, int, int, int);
5086 static rtx function_arg_union_value (int, int);
5088 /* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Traverse the structure
5089 recursively and determine how many registers will be required. */
5091 static void
5092 function_arg_record_value_1 (tree type, HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos,
5093 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms,
5094 bool packed_p)
5096 tree field;
5098 /* We need to compute how many registers are needed so we can
5099 allocate the PARALLEL but before we can do that we need to know
5100 whether there are any packed fields. The ABI obviously doesn't
5101 specify how structures are passed in this case, so they are
5102 defined to be passed in int regs if possible, otherwise memory,
5103 regardless of whether there are fp values present. */
5105 if (! packed_p)
5106 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
5108 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field))
5110 packed_p = true;
5111 break;
5115 /* Compute how many registers we need. */
5116 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
5118 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
5120 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos;
5122 if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0
5123 && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1))
5124 bitpos += int_bit_position (field);
5126 /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset. */
5128 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE)
5129 function_arg_record_value_1 (TREE_TYPE (field),
5130 bitpos,
5131 parms,
5132 packed_p);
5133 else if (FLOAT_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (field))
5134 && TARGET_FPU
5135 && parms->named
5136 && ! packed_p)
5138 if (parms->intoffset != -1)
5140 unsigned int startbit, endbit;
5141 int intslots, this_slotno;
5143 startbit = parms->intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD;
5144 endbit = (bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD;
5146 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD;
5147 this_slotno = parms->slotno + parms->intoffset
5148 / BITS_PER_WORD;
5150 if (intslots > 0 && intslots > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno)
5152 intslots = MAX (0, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
5153 /* We need to pass this field on the stack. */
5154 parms->stack = 1;
5157 parms->nregs += intslots;
5158 parms->intoffset = -1;
5161 /* There's no need to check this_slotno < SPARC_FP_ARG MAX.
5162 If it wasn't true we wouldn't be here. */
5163 parms->nregs += 1;
5164 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
5165 parms->nregs += 1;
5167 else
5169 if (parms->intoffset == -1)
5170 parms->intoffset = bitpos;
5176 /* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Assign the bits of the
5177 structure between parms->intoffset and bitpos to integer registers. */
5179 static void
5180 function_arg_record_value_3 (HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos,
5181 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms)
5183 enum machine_mode mode;
5184 unsigned int regno;
5185 unsigned int startbit, endbit;
5186 int this_slotno, intslots, intoffset;
5187 rtx reg;
5189 if (parms->intoffset == -1)
5190 return;
5192 intoffset = parms->intoffset;
5193 parms->intoffset = -1;
5195 startbit = intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD;
5196 endbit = (bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD;
5197 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD;
5198 this_slotno = parms->slotno + intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD;
5200 intslots = MIN (intslots, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
5201 if (intslots <= 0)
5202 return;
5204 /* If this is the trailing part of a word, only load that much into
5205 the register. Otherwise load the whole register. Note that in
5206 the latter case we may pick up unwanted bits. It's not a problem
5207 at the moment but may wish to revisit. */
5209 if (intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD != 0)
5210 mode = mode_for_size (BITS_PER_WORD - intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD,
5211 MODE_INT, 0);
5212 else
5213 mode = word_mode;
5215 intoffset /= BITS_PER_UNIT;
5218 regno = parms->regbase + this_slotno;
5219 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5220 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs)
5221 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, GEN_INT (intoffset));
5223 this_slotno += 1;
5224 intoffset = (intoffset | (UNITS_PER_WORD-1)) + 1;
5225 mode = word_mode;
5226 parms->nregs += 1;
5227 intslots -= 1;
5229 while (intslots > 0);
5232 /* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value. Traverse the structure
5233 recursively and assign bits to floating point registers. Track which
5234 bits in between need integer registers; invoke function_arg_record_value_3
5235 to make that happen. */
5237 static void
5238 function_arg_record_value_2 (tree type, HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos,
5239 struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms,
5240 bool packed_p)
5242 tree field;
5244 if (! packed_p)
5245 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
5247 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field))
5249 packed_p = true;
5250 break;
5254 for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
5256 if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
5258 HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos;
5260 if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0
5261 && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1))
5262 bitpos += int_bit_position (field);
5264 /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset. */
5266 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE)
5267 function_arg_record_value_2 (TREE_TYPE (field),
5268 bitpos,
5269 parms,
5270 packed_p);
5271 else if (FLOAT_TYPE_P (TREE_TYPE (field))
5272 && TARGET_FPU
5273 && parms->named
5274 && ! packed_p)
5276 int this_slotno = parms->slotno + bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD;
5277 int regno;
5278 enum machine_mode mode = DECL_MODE (field);
5279 rtx reg;
5281 function_arg_record_value_3 (bitpos, parms);
5282 regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + this_slotno * 2
5283 + ((mode == SFmode || mode == SCmode)
5284 && (bitpos & 32) != 0);
5285 switch (mode)
5287 case SCmode: mode = SFmode; break;
5288 case DCmode: mode = DFmode; break;
5289 case TCmode: mode = TFmode; break;
5290 default: break;
5292 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5293 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs)
5294 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg,
5295 GEN_INT (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT));
5296 parms->nregs += 1;
5297 if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
5299 regno += GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / 4;
5300 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5301 XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs)
5302 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg,
5303 GEN_INT ((bitpos + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
5304 / BITS_PER_UNIT));
5305 parms->nregs += 1;
5308 else
5310 if (parms->intoffset == -1)
5311 parms->intoffset = bitpos;
5317 /* Used by function_arg and function_value to implement the complex
5318 conventions of the 64-bit ABI for passing and returning structures.
5319 Return an expression valid as a return value for the two macros
5320 FUNCTION_ARG and FUNCTION_VALUE.
5322 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
5323 This is null for libcalls where that information may
5324 not be available.
5325 MODE is the argument's machine mode.
5326 SLOTNO is the index number of the argument's slot in the parameter array.
5327 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
5328 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
5329 REGBASE is the regno of the base register for the parameter array. */
5331 static rtx
5332 function_arg_record_value (tree type, enum machine_mode mode,
5333 int slotno, int named, int regbase)
5335 HOST_WIDE_INT typesize = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5336 struct function_arg_record_value_parms parms;
5337 unsigned int nregs;
5339 parms.ret = NULL_RTX;
5340 parms.slotno = slotno;
5341 parms.named = named;
5342 parms.regbase = regbase;
5343 parms.stack = 0;
5345 /* Compute how many registers we need. */
5346 parms.nregs = 0;
5347 parms.intoffset = 0;
5348 function_arg_record_value_1 (type, 0, &parms, false);
5350 /* Take into account pending integer fields. */
5351 if (parms.intoffset != -1)
5353 unsigned int startbit, endbit;
5354 int intslots, this_slotno;
5356 startbit = parms.intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD;
5357 endbit = (typesize*BITS_PER_UNIT + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD;
5358 intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD;
5359 this_slotno = slotno + parms.intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD;
5361 if (intslots > 0 && intslots > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno)
5363 intslots = MAX (0, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
5364 /* We need to pass this field on the stack. */
5365 parms.stack = 1;
5368 parms.nregs += intslots;
5370 nregs = parms.nregs;
5372 /* Allocate the vector and handle some annoying special cases. */
5373 if (nregs == 0)
5375 /* ??? Empty structure has no value? Duh? */
5376 if (typesize <= 0)
5378 /* Though there's nothing really to store, return a word register
5379 anyway so the rest of gcc doesn't go nuts. Returning a PARALLEL
5380 leads to breakage due to the fact that there are zero bytes to
5381 load. */
5382 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regbase);
5384 else
5386 /* ??? C++ has structures with no fields, and yet a size. Give up
5387 for now and pass everything back in integer registers. */
5388 nregs = (typesize + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
5390 if (nregs + slotno > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
5391 nregs = SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - slotno;
5393 if (nregs == 0)
5394 abort ();
5396 parms.ret = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, rtvec_alloc (parms.stack + nregs));
5398 /* If at least one field must be passed on the stack, generate
5399 (parallel [(expr_list (nil) ...) ...]) so that all fields will
5400 also be passed on the stack. We can't do much better because the
5401 semantics of FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS doesn't handle the case
5402 of structures for which the fields passed exclusively in registers
5403 are not at the beginning of the structure. */
5404 if (parms.stack)
5405 XVECEXP (parms.ret, 0, 0)
5406 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, const0_rtx);
5408 /* Fill in the entries. */
5409 parms.nregs = 0;
5410 parms.intoffset = 0;
5411 function_arg_record_value_2 (type, 0, &parms, false);
5412 function_arg_record_value_3 (typesize * BITS_PER_UNIT, &parms);
5414 if (parms.nregs != nregs)
5415 abort ();
5417 return parms.ret;
5420 /* Used by function_arg and function_value to implement the conventions
5421 of the 64-bit ABI for passing and returning unions.
5422 Return an expression valid as a return value for the two macros
5423 FUNCTION_ARG and FUNCTION_VALUE.
5425 SIZE is the size in bytes of the union.
5426 REGNO is the hard register the union will be passed in. */
5428 static rtx
5429 function_arg_union_value (int size, int regno)
5431 enum machine_mode mode;
5432 rtx reg;
5434 if (size <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
5435 mode = word_mode;
5436 else
5437 mode = mode_for_size (size * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0);
5439 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5441 /* Unions are passed left-justified. */
5442 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode,
5443 gen_rtvec (1, gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
5444 reg,
5445 const0_rtx)));
5448 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG macro.
5449 Determine where to put an argument to a function.
5450 Value is zero to push the argument on the stack,
5451 or a hard register in which to store the argument.
5453 CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about
5454 the preceding args and about the function being called.
5455 MODE is the argument's machine mode.
5456 TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
5457 This is null for libcalls where that information may
5458 not be available.
5459 NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
5460 (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
5461 INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG. */
5464 function_arg (const struct sparc_args *cum, enum machine_mode mode,
5465 tree type, int named, int incoming_p)
5467 int regbase = (incoming_p
5468 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST
5469 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
5470 int slotno, regno, padding;
5471 rtx reg;
5473 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, incoming_p,
5474 &regno, &padding);
5476 if (slotno == -1)
5477 return 0;
5479 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5481 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5482 return reg;
5485 if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE)
5487 /* Structures up to 16 bytes in size are passed in arg slots on the
5488 stack and are promoted to registers where possible. */
5490 if (int_size_in_bytes (type) > 16)
5491 abort (); /* shouldn't get here */
5493 return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, slotno, named, regbase);
5495 else if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
5497 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5499 if (size > 16)
5500 abort (); /* shouldn't get here */
5502 return function_arg_union_value (size, regno);
5504 /* v9 fp args in reg slots beyond the int reg slots get passed in regs
5505 but also have the slot allocated for them.
5506 If no prototype is in scope fp values in register slots get passed
5507 in two places, either fp regs and int regs or fp regs and memory. */
5508 else if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
5509 || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
5510 && SPARC_FP_REG_P (regno))
5512 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5513 if (cum->prototype_p || cum->libcall_p)
5515 /* "* 2" because fp reg numbers are recorded in 4 byte
5516 quantities. */
5517 #if 0
5518 /* ??? This will cause the value to be passed in the fp reg and
5519 in the stack. When a prototype exists we want to pass the
5520 value in the reg but reserve space on the stack. That's an
5521 optimization, and is deferred [for a bit]. */
5522 if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2)
5523 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode,
5524 gen_rtvec (2,
5525 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
5526 NULL_RTX, const0_rtx),
5527 gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
5528 reg, const0_rtx)));
5529 else
5530 #else
5531 /* ??? It seems that passing back a register even when past
5532 the area declared by REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE will allocate
5533 space appropriately, and will not copy the data onto the
5534 stack, exactly as we desire.
5536 This is due to locate_and_pad_parm being called in
5537 expand_call whenever reg_parm_stack_space > 0, which
5538 while beneficial to our example here, would seem to be
5539 in error from what had been intended. Ho hum... -- r~ */
5540 #endif
5541 return reg;
5543 else
5545 rtx v0, v1;
5547 if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) < SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2)
5549 int intreg;
5551 /* On incoming, we don't need to know that the value
5552 is passed in %f0 and %i0, and it confuses other parts
5553 causing needless spillage even on the simplest cases. */
5554 if (incoming_p)
5555 return reg;
5557 intreg = (SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST
5558 + (regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) / 2);
5560 v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx);
5561 v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_REG (mode, intreg),
5562 const0_rtx);
5563 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1));
5565 else
5567 v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, const0_rtx);
5568 v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx);
5569 return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1));
5573 else
5575 /* Scalar or complex int. */
5576 reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5579 return reg;
5582 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS macro.
5583 For an arg passed partly in registers and partly in memory,
5584 this is the number of registers used.
5585 For args passed entirely in registers or entirely in memory, zero.
5587 Any arg that starts in the first 6 regs but won't entirely fit in them
5588 needs partial registers on v8. On v9, structures with integer
5589 values in arg slots 5,6 will be passed in %o5 and SP+176, and complex fp
5590 values that begin in the last fp reg [where "last fp reg" varies with the
5591 mode] will be split between that reg and memory. */
5594 function_arg_partial_nregs (const struct sparc_args *cum,
5595 enum machine_mode mode, tree type, int named)
5597 int slotno, regno, padding;
5599 /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter. */
5600 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, &regno, &padding);
5602 if (slotno == -1)
5603 return 0;
5605 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5607 if ((slotno + (mode == BLKmode
5608 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type))
5609 : ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))))
5610 > NPARM_REGS (SImode))
5611 return NPARM_REGS (SImode) - slotno;
5612 return 0;
5614 else
5616 if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5618 int size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5619 int align = TYPE_ALIGN (type);
5621 if (align == 16)
5622 slotno += slotno & 1;
5623 if (size > 8 && size <= 16
5624 && slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1)
5625 return 1;
5627 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
5628 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
5629 && ! (TARGET_FPU && named)))
5631 /* The complex types are passed as packed types. */
5632 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= UNITS_PER_WORD)
5633 return 0;
5635 if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 128)
5637 slotno += slotno & 1;
5639 /* ??? The mode needs 3 slots? */
5640 if (slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 2)
5641 return 1;
5643 else
5645 if (slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1)
5646 return 1;
5649 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
5651 if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 128)
5652 slotno += slotno & 1;
5653 if ((slotno + GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
5654 > SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
5655 return 1;
5657 return 0;
5661 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE macro.
5662 !v9: The SPARC ABI stipulates passing struct arguments (of any size) and
5663 quad-precision floats by invisible reference.
5664 v9: Aggregates greater than 16 bytes are passed by reference.
5665 For Pascal, also pass arrays by reference. */
5668 function_arg_pass_by_reference (const struct sparc_args *cum ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
5669 enum machine_mode mode, tree type,
5670 int named ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
5672 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5674 return ((type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5675 || mode == SCmode
5676 || GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > 8);
5678 else
5680 return ((type && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE)
5681 /* Consider complex values as aggregates, so care
5682 for CTImode and TCmode. */
5683 || GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > 16
5684 || (type
5685 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)
5686 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) int_size_in_bytes (type) > 16));
5690 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE macro.
5691 Update the data in CUM to advance over an argument
5692 of mode MODE and data type TYPE.
5693 TYPE is null for libcalls where that information may not be available. */
5695 void
5696 function_arg_advance (struct sparc_args *cum, enum machine_mode mode,
5697 tree type, int named)
5699 int slotno, regno, padding;
5701 /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter. */
5702 slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, &regno, &padding);
5704 /* If register required leading padding, add it. */
5705 if (slotno != -1)
5706 cum->words += padding;
5708 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
5710 cum->words += (mode != BLKmode
5711 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5712 : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type)));
5714 else
5716 if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5718 int size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5720 if (size <= 8)
5721 ++cum->words;
5722 else if (size <= 16)
5723 cum->words += 2;
5724 else /* passed by reference */
5725 ++cum->words;
5727 else
5729 cum->words += (mode != BLKmode
5730 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
5731 : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type)));
5736 /* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING macro.
5737 For the 64 bit ABI structs are always stored left shifted in their
5738 argument slot. */
5740 enum direction
5741 function_arg_padding (enum machine_mode mode, tree type)
5743 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type != 0 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5744 return upward;
5746 /* Fall back to the default. */
5747 return DEFAULT_FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type);
5750 /* Handle FUNCTION_VALUE, FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE, and LIBCALL_VALUE macros.
5751 For v9, function return values are subject to the same rules as arguments,
5752 except that up to 32-bytes may be returned in registers. */
5755 function_value (tree type, enum machine_mode mode, int incoming_p)
5757 int regno;
5759 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type)
5761 int regbase = (incoming_p
5762 ? SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST
5763 : SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
5765 if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE)
5767 /* Structures up to 32 bytes in size are passed in registers,
5768 promoted to fp registers where possible. */
5770 if (int_size_in_bytes (type) > 32)
5771 abort (); /* shouldn't get here */
5773 return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, 0, 1, regbase);
5775 else if (TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
5777 HOST_WIDE_INT size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5779 if (size > 32)
5780 abort (); /* shouldn't get here */
5782 return function_arg_union_value (size, regbase);
5784 else if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5786 /* All other aggregate types are passed in an integer register
5787 in a mode corresponding to the size of the type. */
5788 HOST_WIDE_INT bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5790 if (bytes > 32)
5791 abort ();
5793 mode = mode_for_size (bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0);
5795 else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5796 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD)
5797 mode = word_mode;
5800 if (incoming_p)
5801 regno = BASE_RETURN_VALUE_REG (mode);
5802 else
5803 regno = BASE_OUTGOING_VALUE_REG (mode);
5805 return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
5808 /* Do what is necessary for `va_start'. We look at the current function
5809 to determine if stdarg or varargs is used and return the address of
5810 the first unnamed parameter. */
5812 static rtx
5813 sparc_builtin_saveregs (void)
5815 int first_reg = current_function_args_info.words;
5816 rtx address;
5817 int regno;
5819 for (regno = first_reg; regno < NPARM_REGS (word_mode); regno++)
5820 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (word_mode,
5821 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
5822 frame_pointer_rtx,
5823 GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0)
5824 + (UNITS_PER_WORD
5825 * regno)))),
5826 gen_rtx_REG (word_mode,
5827 BASE_INCOMING_ARG_REG (word_mode) + regno));
5829 address = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
5830 frame_pointer_rtx,
5831 GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0)
5832 + UNITS_PER_WORD * first_reg));
5834 return address;
5837 /* Implement `va_start' for varargs and stdarg. */
5839 void
5840 sparc_va_start (tree valist, rtx nextarg)
5842 nextarg = expand_builtin_saveregs ();
5843 std_expand_builtin_va_start (valist, nextarg);
5846 /* Implement `va_arg'. */
5849 sparc_va_arg (tree valist, tree type)
5851 HOST_WIDE_INT size, rsize, align;
5852 tree addr, incr;
5853 rtx addr_rtx;
5854 int indirect = 0;
5856 /* Round up sizeof(type) to a word. */
5857 size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
5858 rsize = (size + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -UNITS_PER_WORD;
5859 align = 0;
5861 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
5863 if (TYPE_ALIGN (type) >= 2 * (unsigned) BITS_PER_WORD)
5864 align = 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;
5866 /* Consider complex values as aggregates, so care
5867 for CTImode and TCmode. */
5868 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) size > 16)
5870 indirect = 1;
5871 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
5872 align = 0;
5874 else if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
5876 /* SPARC-V9 ABI states that structures up to 16 bytes in size
5877 are given whole slots as needed. */
5878 if (size == 0)
5879 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
5880 else
5881 size = rsize;
5884 else
5886 if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)
5887 || TYPE_MODE (type) == SCmode
5888 || GET_MODE_SIZE (TYPE_MODE (type)) > 8)
5890 indirect = 1;
5891 size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
5895 incr = valist;
5896 if (align)
5898 incr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
5899 build_int_2 (align - 1, 0)));
5900 incr = fold (build (BIT_AND_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
5901 build_int_2 (-align, -1)));
5904 addr = incr = save_expr (incr);
5905 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && size < rsize)
5907 addr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
5908 build_int_2 (rsize - size, 0)));
5910 incr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
5911 build_int_2 (rsize, 0)));
5913 incr = build (MODIFY_EXPR, ptr_type_node, valist, incr);
5914 TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (incr) = 1;
5915 expand_expr (incr, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
5917 addr_rtx = expand_expr (addr, NULL, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
5919 /* If the address isn't aligned properly for the type,
5920 we may need to copy to a temporary.
5921 FIXME: This is inefficient. Usually we can do this
5922 in registers. */
5923 if (align == 0
5924 && TYPE_ALIGN (type) > BITS_PER_WORD
5925 && !indirect)
5927 /* FIXME: We really need to specify that the temporary is live
5928 for the whole function because expand_builtin_va_arg wants
5929 the alias set to be get_varargs_alias_set (), but in this
5930 case the alias set is that for TYPE and if the memory gets
5931 reused it will be reused with alias set TYPE. */
5932 rtx tmp = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 0);
5933 rtx dest_addr;
5935 addr_rtx = force_reg (Pmode, addr_rtx);
5936 addr_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, addr_rtx);
5937 set_mem_alias_set (addr_rtx, get_varargs_alias_set ());
5938 set_mem_align (addr_rtx, BITS_PER_WORD);
5939 tmp = shallow_copy_rtx (tmp);
5940 PUT_MODE (tmp, BLKmode);
5941 set_mem_alias_set (tmp, 0);
5943 dest_addr = emit_block_move (tmp, addr_rtx, GEN_INT (rsize),
5944 BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
5945 if (dest_addr != NULL_RTX)
5946 addr_rtx = dest_addr;
5947 else
5948 addr_rtx = XCEXP (tmp, 0, MEM);
5951 if (indirect)
5953 addr_rtx = force_reg (Pmode, addr_rtx);
5954 addr_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, addr_rtx);
5955 set_mem_alias_set (addr_rtx, get_varargs_alias_set ());
5958 return addr_rtx;
5961 /* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, which is
5962 the operand number of the label. OP is the conditional expression.
5963 XEXP (OP, 0) is assumed to be a condition code register (integer or
5964 floating point) and its mode specifies what kind of comparison we made.
5966 REVERSED is nonzero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison.
5968 ANNUL is nonzero if we should generate an annulling branch.
5970 NOOP is nonzero if we have to follow this branch by a noop.
5972 INSN, if set, is the insn. */
5974 char *
5975 output_cbranch (rtx op, rtx dest, int label, int reversed, int annul,
5976 int noop, rtx insn)
5978 static char string[50];
5979 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
5980 rtx cc_reg = XEXP (op, 0);
5981 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (cc_reg);
5982 const char *labelno, *branch;
5983 int spaces = 8, far;
5984 char *p;
5986 /* v9 branches are limited to +-1MB. If it is too far away,
5987 change
5989 bne,pt %xcc, .LC30
5993 be,pn %xcc, .+12
5995 ba .LC30
5999 fbne,a,pn %fcc2, .LC29
6003 fbe,pt %fcc2, .+16
6005 ba .LC29 */
6007 far = get_attr_length (insn) >= 3;
6008 if (reversed ^ far)
6010 /* Reversal of FP compares takes care -- an ordered compare
6011 becomes an unordered compare and vice versa. */
6012 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
6013 code = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (code);
6014 else
6015 code = reverse_condition (code);
6018 /* Start by writing the branch condition. */
6019 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
6021 switch (code)
6023 case NE:
6024 branch = "fbne";
6025 break;
6026 case EQ:
6027 branch = "fbe";
6028 break;
6029 case GE:
6030 branch = "fbge";
6031 break;
6032 case GT:
6033 branch = "fbg";
6034 break;
6035 case LE:
6036 branch = "fble";
6037 break;
6038 case LT:
6039 branch = "fbl";
6040 break;
6041 case UNORDERED:
6042 branch = "fbu";
6043 break;
6044 case ORDERED:
6045 branch = "fbo";
6046 break;
6047 case UNGT:
6048 branch = "fbug";
6049 break;
6050 case UNLT:
6051 branch = "fbul";
6052 break;
6053 case UNEQ:
6054 branch = "fbue";
6055 break;
6056 case UNGE:
6057 branch = "fbuge";
6058 break;
6059 case UNLE:
6060 branch = "fbule";
6061 break;
6062 case LTGT:
6063 branch = "fblg";
6064 break;
6066 default:
6067 abort ();
6070 /* ??? !v9: FP branches cannot be preceded by another floating point
6071 insn. Because there is currently no concept of pre-delay slots,
6072 we can fix this only by always emitting a nop before a floating
6073 point branch. */
6075 string[0] = '\0';
6076 if (! TARGET_V9)
6077 strcpy (string, "nop\n\t");
6078 strcat (string, branch);
6080 else
6082 switch (code)
6084 case NE:
6085 branch = "bne";
6086 break;
6087 case EQ:
6088 branch = "be";
6089 break;
6090 case GE:
6091 if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
6092 branch = "bpos";
6093 else
6094 branch = "bge";
6095 break;
6096 case GT:
6097 branch = "bg";
6098 break;
6099 case LE:
6100 branch = "ble";
6101 break;
6102 case LT:
6103 if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
6104 branch = "bneg";
6105 else
6106 branch = "bl";
6107 break;
6108 case GEU:
6109 branch = "bgeu";
6110 break;
6111 case GTU:
6112 branch = "bgu";
6113 break;
6114 case LEU:
6115 branch = "bleu";
6116 break;
6117 case LTU:
6118 branch = "blu";
6119 break;
6121 default:
6122 abort ();
6124 strcpy (string, branch);
6126 spaces -= strlen (branch);
6127 p = strchr (string, '\0');
6129 /* Now add the annulling, the label, and a possible noop. */
6130 if (annul && ! far)
6132 strcpy (p, ",a");
6133 p += 2;
6134 spaces -= 2;
6137 if (! TARGET_V9)
6138 labelno = "";
6139 else
6141 rtx note;
6142 int v8 = 0;
6144 if (! far && insn && INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ())
6146 int delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest))
6147 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn)));
6148 /* Leave some instructions for "slop". */
6149 if (delta < -260000 || delta >= 260000)
6150 v8 = 1;
6153 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
6155 static char v9_fcc_labelno[] = "%%fccX, ";
6156 /* Set the char indicating the number of the fcc reg to use. */
6157 v9_fcc_labelno[5] = REGNO (cc_reg) - SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG + '0';
6158 labelno = v9_fcc_labelno;
6159 if (v8)
6161 if (REGNO (cc_reg) == SPARC_FCC_REG)
6162 labelno = "";
6163 else
6164 abort ();
6167 else if (mode == CCXmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
6169 labelno = "%%xcc, ";
6170 if (v8)
6171 abort ();
6173 else
6175 labelno = "%%icc, ";
6176 if (v8)
6177 labelno = "";
6180 if (*labelno && insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX)))
6182 strcpy (p,
6183 ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far)
6184 ? ",pt" : ",pn");
6185 p += 3;
6186 spaces -= 3;
6189 if (spaces > 0)
6190 *p++ = '\t';
6191 else
6192 *p++ = ' ';
6193 strcpy (p, labelno);
6194 p = strchr (p, '\0');
6195 if (far)
6197 strcpy (p, ".+12\n\tnop\n\tb\t");
6198 if (annul || noop)
6199 p[3] = '6';
6200 p += 13;
6202 *p++ = '%';
6203 *p++ = 'l';
6204 /* Set the char indicating the number of the operand containing the
6205 label_ref. */
6206 *p++ = label + '0';
6207 *p = '\0';
6208 if (noop)
6209 strcpy (p, "\n\tnop");
6211 return string;
6214 /* Emit a library call comparison between floating point X and Y.
6215 COMPARISON is the rtl operator to compare with (EQ, NE, GT, etc.).
6216 TARGET_ARCH64 uses _Qp_* functions, which use pointers to TFmode
6217 values as arguments instead of the TFmode registers themselves,
6218 that's why we cannot call emit_float_lib_cmp. */
6219 void
6220 sparc_emit_float_lib_cmp (rtx x, rtx y, enum rtx_code comparison)
6222 const char *qpfunc;
6223 rtx slot0, slot1, result, tem, tem2;
6224 enum machine_mode mode;
6226 switch (comparison)
6228 case EQ:
6229 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_feq" : "_Q_feq";
6230 break;
6232 case NE:
6233 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fne" : "_Q_fne";
6234 break;
6236 case GT:
6237 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fgt" : "_Q_fgt";
6238 break;
6240 case GE:
6241 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fge" : "_Q_fge";
6242 break;
6244 case LT:
6245 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_flt" : "_Q_flt";
6246 break;
6248 case LE:
6249 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fle" : "_Q_fle";
6250 break;
6252 case ORDERED:
6253 case UNORDERED:
6254 case UNGT:
6255 case UNLT:
6256 case UNEQ:
6257 case UNGE:
6258 case UNLE:
6259 case LTGT:
6260 qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_cmp" : "_Q_cmp";
6261 break;
6263 default:
6264 abort();
6265 break;
6268 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
6270 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
6272 slot0 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0);
6273 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, slot0, x));
6275 else
6276 slot0 = x;
6278 if (GET_CODE (y) != MEM)
6280 slot1 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0);
6281 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, slot1, y));
6283 else
6284 slot1 = y;
6286 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc), LCT_NORMAL,
6287 DImode, 2,
6288 XEXP (slot0, 0), Pmode,
6289 XEXP (slot1, 0), Pmode);
6291 mode = DImode;
6293 else
6295 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc), LCT_NORMAL,
6296 SImode, 2,
6297 x, TFmode, y, TFmode);
6299 mode = SImode;
6303 /* Immediately move the result of the libcall into a pseudo
6304 register so reload doesn't clobber the value if it needs
6305 the return register for a spill reg. */
6306 result = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6307 emit_move_insn (result, hard_libcall_value (mode));
6309 switch (comparison)
6311 default:
6312 emit_cmp_insn (result, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
6313 break;
6314 case ORDERED:
6315 case UNORDERED:
6316 emit_cmp_insn (result, GEN_INT(3), comparison == UNORDERED ? EQ : NE,
6317 NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
6318 break;
6319 case UNGT:
6320 case UNGE:
6321 emit_cmp_insn (result, const1_rtx,
6322 comparison == UNGT ? GT : NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
6323 break;
6324 case UNLE:
6325 emit_cmp_insn (result, const2_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
6326 break;
6327 case UNLT:
6328 tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6329 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
6330 emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
6331 else
6332 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
6333 emit_cmp_insn (tem, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
6334 break;
6335 case UNEQ:
6336 case LTGT:
6337 tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6338 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
6339 emit_insn (gen_addsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
6340 else
6341 emit_insn (gen_adddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
6342 tem2 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6343 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
6344 emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx));
6345 else
6346 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx));
6347 emit_cmp_insn (tem2, const0_rtx, comparison == UNEQ ? EQ : NE,
6348 NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
6349 break;
6353 /* Generate an unsigned DImode to FP conversion. This is the same code
6354 optabs would emit if we didn't have TFmode patterns. */
6356 void
6357 sparc_emit_floatunsdi (rtx *operands)
6359 rtx neglab, donelab, i0, i1, f0, in, out;
6360 enum machine_mode mode;
6362 out = operands[0];
6363 in = force_reg (DImode, operands[1]);
6364 mode = GET_MODE (out);
6365 neglab = gen_label_rtx ();
6366 donelab = gen_label_rtx ();
6367 i0 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
6368 i1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
6369 f0 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
6371 emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (in, const0_rtx, LT, const0_rtx, DImode, 0, neglab);
6373 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, in)));
6374 emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (donelab));
6375 emit_barrier ();
6377 emit_label (neglab);
6379 emit_insn (gen_lshrdi3 (i0, in, const1_rtx));
6380 emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (i1, in, const1_rtx));
6381 emit_insn (gen_iordi3 (i0, i0, i1));
6382 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, f0, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, i0)));
6383 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, f0, f0)));
6385 emit_label (donelab);
6388 /* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, testing
6389 register REG. LABEL is the operand number of the label; REG is the
6390 operand number of the reg. OP is the conditional expression. The mode
6391 of REG says what kind of comparison we made.
6393 REVERSED is nonzero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison.
6395 ANNUL is nonzero if we should generate an annulling branch.
6397 NOOP is nonzero if we have to follow this branch by a noop. */
6399 char *
6400 output_v9branch (rtx op, rtx dest, int reg, int label, int reversed,
6401 int annul, int noop, rtx insn)
6403 static char string[50];
6404 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
6405 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0));
6406 rtx note;
6407 int far;
6408 char *p;
6410 /* branch on register are limited to +-128KB. If it is too far away,
6411 change
6413 brnz,pt %g1, .LC30
6417 brz,pn %g1, .+12
6419 ba,pt %xcc, .LC30
6423 brgez,a,pn %o1, .LC29
6427 brlz,pt %o1, .+16
6429 ba,pt %xcc, .LC29 */
6431 far = get_attr_length (insn) >= 3;
6433 /* If not floating-point or if EQ or NE, we can just reverse the code. */
6434 if (reversed ^ far)
6435 code = reverse_condition (code);
6437 /* Only 64 bit versions of these instructions exist. */
6438 if (mode != DImode)
6439 abort ();
6441 /* Start by writing the branch condition. */
6443 switch (code)
6445 case NE:
6446 strcpy (string, "brnz");
6447 break;
6449 case EQ:
6450 strcpy (string, "brz");
6451 break;
6453 case GE:
6454 strcpy (string, "brgez");
6455 break;
6457 case LT:
6458 strcpy (string, "brlz");
6459 break;
6461 case LE:
6462 strcpy (string, "brlez");
6463 break;
6465 case GT:
6466 strcpy (string, "brgz");
6467 break;
6469 default:
6470 abort ();
6473 p = strchr (string, '\0');
6475 /* Now add the annulling, reg, label, and nop. */
6476 if (annul && ! far)
6478 strcpy (p, ",a");
6479 p += 2;
6482 if (insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX)))
6484 strcpy (p,
6485 ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far)
6486 ? ",pt" : ",pn");
6487 p += 3;
6490 *p = p < string + 8 ? '\t' : ' ';
6491 p++;
6492 *p++ = '%';
6493 *p++ = '0' + reg;
6494 *p++ = ',';
6495 *p++ = ' ';
6496 if (far)
6498 int veryfar = 1, delta;
6500 if (INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ())
6502 delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest))
6503 - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn)));
6504 /* Leave some instructions for "slop". */
6505 if (delta >= -260000 && delta < 260000)
6506 veryfar = 0;
6509 strcpy (p, ".+12\n\tnop\n\t");
6510 if (annul || noop)
6511 p[3] = '6';
6512 p += 11;
6513 if (veryfar)
6515 strcpy (p, "b\t");
6516 p += 2;
6518 else
6520 strcpy (p, "ba,pt\t%%xcc, ");
6521 p += 13;
6524 *p++ = '%';
6525 *p++ = 'l';
6526 *p++ = '0' + label;
6527 *p = '\0';
6529 if (noop)
6530 strcpy (p, "\n\tnop");
6532 return string;
6535 /* Return 1, if any of the registers of the instruction are %l[0-7] or %o[0-7].
6536 Such instructions cannot be used in the delay slot of return insn on v9.
6537 If TEST is 0, also rename all %i[0-7] registers to their %o[0-7] counterparts.
6540 static int
6541 epilogue_renumber (register rtx *where, int test)
6543 register const char *fmt;
6544 register int i;
6545 register enum rtx_code code;
6547 if (*where == 0)
6548 return 0;
6550 code = GET_CODE (*where);
6552 switch (code)
6554 case REG:
6555 if (REGNO (*where) >= 8 && REGNO (*where) < 24) /* oX or lX */
6556 return 1;
6557 if (! test && REGNO (*where) >= 24 && REGNO (*where) < 32)
6558 *where = gen_rtx_REG (GET_MODE (*where), OUTGOING_REGNO (REGNO(*where)));
6559 case SCRATCH:
6560 case CC0:
6561 case PC:
6562 case CONST_INT:
6563 case CONST_DOUBLE:
6564 return 0;
6566 /* Do not replace the frame pointer with the stack pointer because
6567 it can cause the delayed instruction to load below the stack.
6568 This occurs when instructions like:
6570 (set (reg/i:SI 24 %i0)
6571 (mem/f:SI (plus:SI (reg/f:SI 30 %fp)
6572 (const_int -20 [0xffffffec])) 0))
6574 are in the return delayed slot. */
6575 case PLUS:
6576 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG
6577 && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
6578 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 1)) != CONST_INT
6579 || INTVAL (XEXP (*where, 1)) < SPARC_STACK_BIAS))
6580 return 1;
6581 break;
6583 case MEM:
6584 if (SPARC_STACK_BIAS
6585 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG
6586 && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
6587 return 1;
6588 break;
6590 default:
6591 break;
6594 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
6596 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
6598 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
6600 register int j;
6601 for (j = XVECLEN (*where, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
6602 if (epilogue_renumber (&(XVECEXP (*where, i, j)), test))
6603 return 1;
6605 else if (fmt[i] == 'e'
6606 && epilogue_renumber (&(XEXP (*where, i)), test))
6607 return 1;
6609 return 0;
6612 /* Leaf functions and non-leaf functions have different needs. */
6614 static const int
6615 reg_leaf_alloc_order[] = REG_LEAF_ALLOC_ORDER;
6617 static const int
6618 reg_nonleaf_alloc_order[] = REG_ALLOC_ORDER;
6620 static const int *const reg_alloc_orders[] = {
6621 reg_leaf_alloc_order,
6622 reg_nonleaf_alloc_order};
6624 void
6625 order_regs_for_local_alloc (void)
6627 static int last_order_nonleaf = 1;
6629 if (regs_ever_live[15] != last_order_nonleaf)
6631 last_order_nonleaf = !last_order_nonleaf;
6632 memcpy ((char *) reg_alloc_order,
6633 (const char *) reg_alloc_orders[last_order_nonleaf],
6634 FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof (int));
6638 /* Return 1 if REG and MEM are legitimate enough to allow the various
6639 mem<-->reg splits to be run. */
6642 sparc_splitdi_legitimate (rtx reg, rtx mem)
6644 /* Punt if we are here by mistake. */
6645 if (! reload_completed)
6646 abort ();
6648 /* We must have an offsettable memory reference. */
6649 if (! offsettable_memref_p (mem))
6650 return 0;
6652 /* If we have legitimate args for ldd/std, we do not want
6653 the split to happen. */
6654 if ((REGNO (reg) % 2) == 0
6655 && mem_min_alignment (mem, 8))
6656 return 0;
6658 /* Success. */
6659 return 1;
6662 /* Return 1 if x and y are some kind of REG and they refer to
6663 different hard registers. This test is guaranteed to be
6664 run after reload. */
6667 sparc_absnegfloat_split_legitimate (rtx x, rtx y)
6669 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
6670 return 0;
6671 if (GET_CODE (y) != REG)
6672 return 0;
6673 if (REGNO (x) == REGNO (y))
6674 return 0;
6675 return 1;
6678 /* Return 1 if REGNO (reg1) is even and REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1.
6679 This makes them candidates for using ldd and std insns.
6681 Note reg1 and reg2 *must* be hard registers. */
6684 registers_ok_for_ldd_peep (rtx reg1, rtx reg2)
6686 /* We might have been passed a SUBREG. */
6687 if (GET_CODE (reg1) != REG || GET_CODE (reg2) != REG)
6688 return 0;
6690 if (REGNO (reg1) % 2 != 0)
6691 return 0;
6693 /* Integer ldd is deprecated in SPARC V9 */
6694 if (TARGET_V9 && REGNO (reg1) < 32)
6695 return 0;
6697 return (REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1);
6700 /* Return 1 if the addresses in mem1 and mem2 are suitable for use in
6701 an ldd or std insn.
6703 This can only happen when addr1 and addr2, the addresses in mem1
6704 and mem2, are consecutive memory locations (addr1 + 4 == addr2).
6705 addr1 must also be aligned on a 64-bit boundary.
6707 Also iff dependent_reg_rtx is not null it should not be used to
6708 compute the address for mem1, i.e. we cannot optimize a sequence
6709 like:
6710 ld [%o0], %o0
6711 ld [%o0 + 4], %o1
6713 ldd [%o0], %o0
6714 nor:
6715 ld [%g3 + 4], %g3
6716 ld [%g3], %g2
6718 ldd [%g3], %g2
6720 But, note that the transformation from:
6721 ld [%g2 + 4], %g3
6722 ld [%g2], %g2
6724 ldd [%g2], %g2
6725 is perfectly fine. Thus, the peephole2 patterns always pass us
6726 the destination register of the first load, never the second one.
6728 For stores we don't have a similar problem, so dependent_reg_rtx is
6729 NULL_RTX. */
6732 mems_ok_for_ldd_peep (rtx mem1, rtx mem2, rtx dependent_reg_rtx)
6734 rtx addr1, addr2;
6735 unsigned int reg1;
6736 HOST_WIDE_INT offset1;
6738 /* The mems cannot be volatile. */
6739 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem1) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem2))
6740 return 0;
6742 /* MEM1 should be aligned on a 64-bit boundary. */
6743 if (MEM_ALIGN (mem1) < 64)
6744 return 0;
6746 addr1 = XEXP (mem1, 0);
6747 addr2 = XEXP (mem2, 0);
6749 /* Extract a register number and offset (if used) from the first addr. */
6750 if (GET_CODE (addr1) == PLUS)
6752 /* If not a REG, return zero. */
6753 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 0)) != REG)
6754 return 0;
6755 else
6757 reg1 = REGNO (XEXP (addr1, 0));
6758 /* The offset must be constant! */
6759 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 1)) != CONST_INT)
6760 return 0;
6761 offset1 = INTVAL (XEXP (addr1, 1));
6764 else if (GET_CODE (addr1) != REG)
6765 return 0;
6766 else
6768 reg1 = REGNO (addr1);
6769 /* This was a simple (mem (reg)) expression. Offset is 0. */
6770 offset1 = 0;
6773 /* Make sure the second address is a (mem (plus (reg) (const_int). */
6774 if (GET_CODE (addr2) != PLUS)
6775 return 0;
6777 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 0)) != REG
6778 || GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != CONST_INT)
6779 return 0;
6781 if (reg1 != REGNO (XEXP (addr2, 0)))
6782 return 0;
6784 if (dependent_reg_rtx != NULL_RTX && reg1 == REGNO (dependent_reg_rtx))
6785 return 0;
6787 /* The first offset must be evenly divisible by 8 to ensure the
6788 address is 64 bit aligned. */
6789 if (offset1 % 8 != 0)
6790 return 0;
6792 /* The offset for the second addr must be 4 more than the first addr. */
6793 if (INTVAL (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != offset1 + 4)
6794 return 0;
6796 /* All the tests passed. addr1 and addr2 are valid for ldd and std
6797 instructions. */
6798 return 1;
6801 /* Return 1 if reg is a pseudo, or is the first register in
6802 a hard register pair. This makes it a candidate for use in
6803 ldd and std insns. */
6806 register_ok_for_ldd (rtx reg)
6808 /* We might have been passed a SUBREG. */
6809 if (GET_CODE (reg) != REG)
6810 return 0;
6812 if (REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6813 return (REGNO (reg) % 2 == 0);
6814 else
6815 return 1;
6818 /* Print operand X (an rtx) in assembler syntax to file FILE.
6819 CODE is a letter or dot (`z' in `%z0') or 0 if no letter was specified.
6820 For `%' followed by punctuation, CODE is the punctuation and X is null. */
6822 void
6823 print_operand (FILE *file, rtx x, int code)
6825 switch (code)
6827 case '#':
6828 /* Output a 'nop' if there's nothing for the delay slot. */
6829 if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0)
6830 fputs ("\n\t nop", file);
6831 return;
6832 case '*':
6833 /* Output an annul flag if there's nothing for the delay slot and we
6834 are optimizing. This is always used with '(' below. */
6835 /* Sun OS 4.1.1 dbx can't handle an annulled unconditional branch;
6836 this is a dbx bug. So, we only do this when optimizing. */
6837 /* On UltraSPARC, a branch in a delay slot causes a pipeline flush.
6838 Always emit a nop in case the next instruction is a branch. */
6839 if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0
6840 && (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9))
6841 fputs (",a", file);
6842 return;
6843 case '(':
6844 /* Output a 'nop' if there's nothing for the delay slot and we are
6845 not optimizing. This is always used with '*' above. */
6846 if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0
6847 && ! (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9))
6848 fputs ("\n\t nop", file);
6849 return;
6850 case '_':
6851 /* Output the Embedded Medium/Anywhere code model base register. */
6852 fputs (EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, file);
6853 return;
6854 case '@':
6855 /* Print out what we are using as the frame pointer. This might
6856 be %fp, or might be %sp+offset. */
6857 /* ??? What if offset is too big? Perhaps the caller knows it isn't? */
6858 fprintf (file, "%s+"HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, frame_base_name, frame_base_offset);
6859 return;
6860 case '&':
6861 /* Print some local dynamic TLS name. */
6862 assemble_name (file, get_some_local_dynamic_name ());
6863 return;
6864 case 'Y':
6865 /* Adjust the operand to take into account a RESTORE operation. */
6866 if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT)
6867 break;
6868 else if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
6869 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand");
6870 else if (REGNO (x) < 8)
6871 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6872 else if (REGNO (x) >= 24 && REGNO (x) < 32)
6873 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)-16], file);
6874 else
6875 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand");
6876 return;
6877 case 'L':
6878 /* Print out the low order register name of a register pair. */
6879 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
6880 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
6881 else
6882 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6883 return;
6884 case 'H':
6885 /* Print out the high order register name of a register pair. */
6886 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
6887 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6888 else
6889 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
6890 return;
6891 case 'R':
6892 /* Print out the second register name of a register pair or quad.
6893 I.e., R (%o0) => %o1. */
6894 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
6895 return;
6896 case 'S':
6897 /* Print out the third register name of a register quad.
6898 I.e., S (%o0) => %o2. */
6899 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+2], file);
6900 return;
6901 case 'T':
6902 /* Print out the fourth register name of a register quad.
6903 I.e., T (%o0) => %o3. */
6904 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+3], file);
6905 return;
6906 case 'x':
6907 /* Print a condition code register. */
6908 if (REGNO (x) == SPARC_ICC_REG)
6910 /* We don't handle CC[X]_NOOVmode because they're not supposed
6911 to occur here. */
6912 if (GET_MODE (x) == CCmode)
6913 fputs ("%icc", file);
6914 else if (GET_MODE (x) == CCXmode)
6915 fputs ("%xcc", file);
6916 else
6917 abort ();
6919 else
6920 /* %fccN register */
6921 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
6922 return;
6923 case 'm':
6924 /* Print the operand's address only. */
6925 output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
6926 return;
6927 case 'r':
6928 /* In this case we need a register. Use %g0 if the
6929 operand is const0_rtx. */
6930 if (x == const0_rtx
6931 || (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode && x == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (x))))
6933 fputs ("%g0", file);
6934 return;
6936 else
6937 break;
6939 case 'A':
6940 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6942 case IOR: fputs ("or", file); break;
6943 case AND: fputs ("and", file); break;
6944 case XOR: fputs ("xor", file); break;
6945 default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%A operand");
6947 return;
6949 case 'B':
6950 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6952 case IOR: fputs ("orn", file); break;
6953 case AND: fputs ("andn", file); break;
6954 case XOR: fputs ("xnor", file); break;
6955 default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%B operand");
6957 return;
6959 /* These are used by the conditional move instructions. */
6960 case 'c' :
6961 case 'C':
6963 enum rtx_code rc = GET_CODE (x);
6965 if (code == 'c')
6967 enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
6968 if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
6969 rc = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (GET_CODE (x));
6970 else
6971 rc = reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x));
6973 switch (rc)
6975 case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break;
6976 case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break;
6977 case GE: fputs ("ge", file); break;
6978 case GT: fputs ("g", file); break;
6979 case LE: fputs ("le", file); break;
6980 case LT: fputs ("l", file); break;
6981 case GEU: fputs ("geu", file); break;
6982 case GTU: fputs ("gu", file); break;
6983 case LEU: fputs ("leu", file); break;
6984 case LTU: fputs ("lu", file); break;
6985 case LTGT: fputs ("lg", file); break;
6986 case UNORDERED: fputs ("u", file); break;
6987 case ORDERED: fputs ("o", file); break;
6988 case UNLT: fputs ("ul", file); break;
6989 case UNLE: fputs ("ule", file); break;
6990 case UNGT: fputs ("ug", file); break;
6991 case UNGE: fputs ("uge", file); break;
6992 case UNEQ: fputs ("ue", file); break;
6993 default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'c'
6994 ? "invalid %%c operand"
6995 : "invalid %%C operand");
6997 return;
7000 /* These are used by the movr instruction pattern. */
7001 case 'd':
7002 case 'D':
7004 enum rtx_code rc = (code == 'd'
7005 ? reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x))
7006 : GET_CODE (x));
7007 switch (rc)
7009 case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break;
7010 case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break;
7011 case GE: fputs ("gez", file); break;
7012 case LT: fputs ("lz", file); break;
7013 case LE: fputs ("lez", file); break;
7014 case GT: fputs ("gz", file); break;
7015 default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'd'
7016 ? "invalid %%d operand"
7017 : "invalid %%D operand");
7019 return;
7022 case 'b':
7024 /* Print a sign-extended character. */
7025 int i = trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (x), QImode);
7026 fprintf (file, "%d", i);
7027 return;
7030 case 'f':
7031 /* Operand must be a MEM; write its address. */
7032 if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
7033 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%f operand");
7034 output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
7035 return;
7037 case 's':
7039 /* Print a sign-extended 32-bit value. */
7040 HOST_WIDE_INT i;
7041 if (GET_CODE(x) == CONST_INT)
7042 i = INTVAL (x);
7043 else if (GET_CODE(x) == CONST_DOUBLE)
7044 i = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x);
7045 else
7047 output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%s operand");
7048 return;
7050 i = trunc_int_for_mode (i, SImode);
7051 fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, i);
7052 return;
7055 case 0:
7056 /* Do nothing special. */
7057 break;
7059 default:
7060 /* Undocumented flag. */
7061 output_operand_lossage ("invalid operand output code");
7064 if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
7065 fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
7066 else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
7068 fputc ('[', file);
7069 /* Poor Sun assembler doesn't understand absolute addressing. */
7070 if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
7071 fputs ("%g0+", file);
7072 output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
7073 fputc (']', file);
7075 else if (GET_CODE (x) == HIGH)
7077 fputs ("%hi(", file);
7078 output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 0));
7079 fputc (')', file);
7081 else if (GET_CODE (x) == LO_SUM)
7083 print_operand (file, XEXP (x, 0), 0);
7084 if (TARGET_CM_MEDMID)
7085 fputs ("+%l44(", file);
7086 else
7087 fputs ("+%lo(", file);
7088 output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 1));
7089 fputc (')', file);
7091 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE
7092 && (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode
7093 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT))
7095 if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == 0)
7096 fprintf (file, "%u", (unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x));
7097 else if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == -1
7098 && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x) < 0)
7099 fprintf (file, "%d", (int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x));
7100 else
7101 output_operand_lossage ("long long constant not a valid immediate operand");
7103 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE)
7104 output_operand_lossage ("floating point constant not a valid immediate operand");
7105 else { output_addr_const (file, x); }
7108 /* Target hook for assembling integer objects. The sparc version has
7109 special handling for aligned DI-mode objects. */
7111 static bool
7112 sparc_assemble_integer (rtx x, unsigned int size, int aligned_p)
7114 /* ??? We only output .xword's for symbols and only then in environments
7115 where the assembler can handle them. */
7116 if (aligned_p && size == 8
7117 && (GET_CODE (x) != CONST_INT && GET_CODE (x) != CONST_DOUBLE))
7119 if (TARGET_V9)
7121 assemble_integer_with_op ("\t.xword\t", x);
7122 return true;
7124 else
7126 assemble_aligned_integer (4, const0_rtx);
7127 assemble_aligned_integer (4, x);
7128 return true;
7131 return default_assemble_integer (x, size, aligned_p);
7134 /* Return the value of a code used in the .proc pseudo-op that says
7135 what kind of result this function returns. For non-C types, we pick
7136 the closest C type. */
7138 #ifndef SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
7139 #define SHORT_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_UNIT * 2)
7140 #endif
7142 #ifndef INT_TYPE_SIZE
7143 #define INT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
7144 #endif
7146 #ifndef LONG_TYPE_SIZE
7147 #define LONG_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
7148 #endif
7150 #ifndef LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
7151 #define LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
7152 #endif
7154 #ifndef FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
7155 #define FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
7156 #endif
7158 #ifndef DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
7159 #define DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
7160 #endif
7162 #ifndef LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
7163 #define LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
7164 #endif
7166 unsigned long
7167 sparc_type_code (register tree type)
7169 register unsigned long qualifiers = 0;
7170 register unsigned shift;
7172 /* Only the first 30 bits of the qualifier are valid. We must refrain from
7173 setting more, since some assemblers will give an error for this. Also,
7174 we must be careful to avoid shifts of 32 bits or more to avoid getting
7175 unpredictable results. */
7177 for (shift = 6; shift < 30; shift += 2, type = TREE_TYPE (type))
7179 switch (TREE_CODE (type))
7181 case ERROR_MARK:
7182 return qualifiers;
7184 case ARRAY_TYPE:
7185 qualifiers |= (3 << shift);
7186 break;
7188 case FUNCTION_TYPE:
7189 case METHOD_TYPE:
7190 qualifiers |= (2 << shift);
7191 break;
7193 case POINTER_TYPE:
7194 case REFERENCE_TYPE:
7195 case OFFSET_TYPE:
7196 qualifiers |= (1 << shift);
7197 break;
7199 case RECORD_TYPE:
7200 return (qualifiers | 8);
7202 case UNION_TYPE:
7203 case QUAL_UNION_TYPE:
7204 return (qualifiers | 9);
7206 case ENUMERAL_TYPE:
7207 return (qualifiers | 10);
7209 case VOID_TYPE:
7210 return (qualifiers | 16);
7212 case INTEGER_TYPE:
7213 /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying
7214 type. */
7215 if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0)
7216 break;
7218 /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C,
7219 without messing up if the language is not C. We do this by
7220 testing TYPE_PRECISION and TREE_UNSIGNED. The old code used to
7221 look at both the names and the above fields, but that's redundant.
7222 Any type whose size is between two C types will be considered
7223 to be the wider of the two types. Also, we do not have a
7224 special code to use for "long long", so anything wider than
7225 long is treated the same. Note that we can't distinguish
7226 between "int" and "long" in this code if they are the same
7227 size, but that's fine, since neither can the assembler. */
7229 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= CHAR_TYPE_SIZE)
7230 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 12 : 2));
7232 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= SHORT_TYPE_SIZE)
7233 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 13 : 3));
7235 else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= INT_TYPE_SIZE)
7236 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 14 : 4));
7238 else
7239 return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 15 : 5));
7241 case REAL_TYPE:
7242 /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying
7243 type. */
7244 if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0)
7245 break;
7247 /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C,
7248 without messing up if the language is not C. */
7250 if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) == FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE)
7251 return (qualifiers | 6);
7253 else
7254 return (qualifiers | 7);
7256 case COMPLEX_TYPE: /* GNU Fortran COMPLEX type. */
7257 /* ??? We need to distinguish between double and float complex types,
7258 but I don't know how yet because I can't reach this code from
7259 existing front-ends. */
7260 return (qualifiers | 7); /* Who knows? */
7262 case CHAR_TYPE: /* GNU Pascal CHAR type. Not used in C. */
7263 case BOOLEAN_TYPE: /* GNU Fortran BOOLEAN type. */
7264 case FILE_TYPE: /* GNU Pascal FILE type. */
7265 case SET_TYPE: /* GNU Pascal SET type. */
7266 case LANG_TYPE: /* ? */
7267 return qualifiers;
7269 default:
7270 abort (); /* Not a type! */
7274 return qualifiers;
7277 /* Nested function support. */
7279 /* Emit RTL insns to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
7280 FNADDR is an RTX for the address of the function's pure code.
7281 CXT is an RTX for the static chain value for the function.
7283 This takes 16 insns: 2 shifts & 2 ands (to split up addresses), 4 sethi
7284 (to load in opcodes), 4 iors (to merge address and opcodes), and 4 writes
7285 (to store insns). This is a bit excessive. Perhaps a different
7286 mechanism would be better here.
7288 Emit enough FLUSH insns to synchronize the data and instruction caches. */
7290 void
7291 sparc_initialize_trampoline (rtx tramp, rtx fnaddr, rtx cxt)
7293 /* SPARC 32-bit trampoline:
7295 sethi %hi(fn), %g1
7296 sethi %hi(static), %g2
7297 jmp %g1+%lo(fn)
7298 or %g2, %lo(static), %g2
7300 SETHI i,r = 00rr rrr1 00ii iiii iiii iiii iiii iiii
7301 JMPL r+i,d = 10dd ddd1 1100 0rrr rr1i iiii iiii iiii
7304 emit_move_insn
7305 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 0)),
7306 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
7307 expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, fnaddr,
7308 size_int (10), 0, 1),
7309 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x03000000, SImode)),
7310 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
7312 emit_move_insn
7313 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 4)),
7314 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
7315 expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, cxt,
7316 size_int (10), 0, 1),
7317 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x05000000, SImode)),
7318 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
7320 emit_move_insn
7321 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)),
7322 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
7323 expand_and (SImode, fnaddr, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX),
7324 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c06000, SImode)),
7325 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
7327 emit_move_insn
7328 (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 12)),
7329 expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
7330 expand_and (SImode, cxt, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX),
7331 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x8410a000, SImode)),
7332 NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));
7334 /* On UltraSPARC a flush flushes an entire cache line. The trampoline is
7335 aligned on a 16 byte boundary so one flush clears it all. */
7336 emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, tramp))));
7337 if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
7338 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
7339 emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode,
7340 plus_constant (tramp, 8)))));
7342 /* Call __enable_execute_stack after writing onto the stack to make sure
7343 the stack address is accessible. */
7344 #ifdef TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
7345 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"),
7346 LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, tramp, Pmode);
7347 #endif
7351 /* The 64-bit version is simpler because it makes more sense to load the
7352 values as "immediate" data out of the trampoline. It's also easier since
7353 we can read the PC without clobbering a register. */
7355 void
7356 sparc64_initialize_trampoline (rtx tramp, rtx fnaddr, rtx cxt)
7358 /* SPARC 64-bit trampoline:
7360 rd %pc, %g1
7361 ldx [%g1+24], %g5
7362 jmp %g5
7363 ldx [%g1+16], %g5
7364 +16 bytes data
7367 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, tramp),
7368 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x83414000, SImode)));
7369 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 4)),
7370 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586018, SImode)));
7371 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)),
7372 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c14000, SImode)));
7373 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 12)),
7374 GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586010, SImode)));
7375 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 16)), cxt);
7376 emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 24)), fnaddr);
7377 emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, tramp))));
7379 if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
7380 && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
7381 emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)))));
7383 /* Call __enable_execute_stack after writing onto the stack to make sure
7384 the stack address is accessible. */
7385 #ifdef TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
7386 emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"),
7387 LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, tramp, Pmode);
7388 #endif
7391 /* Adjust the cost of a scheduling dependency. Return the new cost of
7392 a dependency LINK or INSN on DEP_INSN. COST is the current cost. */
7394 static int
7395 supersparc_adjust_cost (rtx insn, rtx link, rtx dep_insn, int cost)
7397 enum attr_type insn_type;
7399 if (! recog_memoized (insn))
7400 return 0;
7402 insn_type = get_attr_type (insn);
7404 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == 0)
7406 /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some
7407 cycles later. */
7409 /* if a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address;
7410 add an extra "cycle". Note that the cost could be two cycles
7411 if the reg was written late in an instruction group; we ca not tell
7412 here. */
7413 if (insn_type == TYPE_LOAD || insn_type == TYPE_FPLOAD)
7414 return cost + 3;
7416 /* Get the delay only if the address of the store is the dependence. */
7417 if (insn_type == TYPE_STORE || insn_type == TYPE_FPSTORE)
7419 rtx pat = PATTERN(insn);
7420 rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn);
7422 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET)
7423 return cost; /* This should not happen! */
7425 /* The dependency between the two instructions was on the data that
7426 is being stored. Assume that this implies that the address of the
7427 store is not dependent. */
7428 if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat)))
7429 return cost;
7431 return cost + 3; /* An approximation. */
7434 /* A shift instruction cannot receive its data from an instruction
7435 in the same cycle; add a one cycle penalty. */
7436 if (insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
7437 return cost + 3; /* Split before cascade into shift. */
7439 else
7441 /* Anti- or output- dependency; DEP_INSN reads/writes a register that
7442 INSN writes some cycles later. */
7444 /* These are only significant for the fpu unit; writing a fp reg before
7445 the fpu has finished with it stalls the processor. */
7447 /* Reusing an integer register causes no problems. */
7448 if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
7449 return 0;
7452 return cost;
7455 static int
7456 hypersparc_adjust_cost (rtx insn, rtx link, rtx dep_insn, int cost)
7458 enum attr_type insn_type, dep_type;
7459 rtx pat = PATTERN(insn);
7460 rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn);
7462 if (recog_memoized (insn) < 0 || recog_memoized (dep_insn) < 0)
7463 return cost;
7465 insn_type = get_attr_type (insn);
7466 dep_type = get_attr_type (dep_insn);
7468 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (link))
7470 case 0:
7471 /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some
7472 cycles later. */
7474 switch (insn_type)
7476 case TYPE_STORE:
7477 case TYPE_FPSTORE:
7478 /* Get the delay iff the address of the store is the dependence. */
7479 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET)
7480 return cost;
7482 if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat)))
7483 return cost;
7484 return cost + 3;
7486 case TYPE_LOAD:
7487 case TYPE_SLOAD:
7488 case TYPE_FPLOAD:
7489 /* If a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address. If
7490 the addresses aren't equal, then it might be a false dependency */
7491 if (dep_type == TYPE_STORE || dep_type == TYPE_FPSTORE)
7493 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET
7494 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (dep_pat)) != MEM
7495 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) != MEM
7496 || ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (dep_pat), 0),
7497 XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0)))
7498 return cost + 2;
7500 return cost + 8;
7502 break;
7504 case TYPE_BRANCH:
7505 /* Compare to branch latency is 0. There is no benefit from
7506 separating compare and branch. */
7507 if (dep_type == TYPE_COMPARE)
7508 return 0;
7509 /* Floating point compare to branch latency is less than
7510 compare to conditional move. */
7511 if (dep_type == TYPE_FPCMP)
7512 return cost - 1;
7513 break;
7514 default:
7515 break;
7517 break;
7519 case REG_DEP_ANTI:
7520 /* Anti-dependencies only penalize the fpu unit. */
7521 if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
7522 return 0;
7523 break;
7525 default:
7526 break;
7529 return cost;
7532 static int
7533 sparc_adjust_cost(rtx insn, rtx link, rtx dep, int cost)
7535 switch (sparc_cpu)
7537 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
7538 cost = supersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost);
7539 break;
7540 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
7541 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
7542 cost = hypersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost);
7543 break;
7544 default:
7545 break;
7547 return cost;
7550 static void
7551 sparc_sched_init (FILE *dump ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7552 int sched_verbose ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7553 int max_ready ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
7557 static int
7558 sparc_use_dfa_pipeline_interface (void)
7560 if ((1 << sparc_cpu) &
7561 ((1 << PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_CYPRESS) |
7562 (1 << PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC) |
7563 (1 << PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X) | (1 << PROCESSOR_TSC701) |
7564 (1 << PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)))
7565 return 1;
7566 return 0;
7569 static int
7570 sparc_use_sched_lookahead (void)
7572 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
7573 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
7574 return 4;
7575 if ((1 << sparc_cpu) &
7576 ((1 << PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC) |
7577 (1 << PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X)))
7578 return 3;
7579 return 0;
7582 static int
7583 sparc_issue_rate (void)
7585 switch (sparc_cpu)
7587 default:
7588 return 1;
7589 case PROCESSOR_V9:
7590 /* Assume V9 processors are capable of at least dual-issue. */
7591 return 2;
7592 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
7593 return 3;
7594 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
7595 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
7596 return 2;
7597 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
7598 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
7599 return 4;
7603 static int
7604 set_extends (rtx insn)
7606 register rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
7608 switch (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)))
7610 /* Load and some shift instructions zero extend. */
7611 case MEM:
7612 case ZERO_EXTEND:
7613 /* sethi clears the high bits */
7614 case HIGH:
7615 /* LO_SUM is used with sethi. sethi cleared the high
7616 bits and the values used with lo_sum are positive */
7617 case LO_SUM:
7618 /* Store flag stores 0 or 1 */
7619 case LT: case LTU:
7620 case GT: case GTU:
7621 case LE: case LEU:
7622 case GE: case GEU:
7623 case EQ:
7624 case NE:
7625 return 1;
7626 case AND:
7628 rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0);
7629 rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1);
7630 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
7631 return INTVAL (op1) >= 0;
7632 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
7633 return 0;
7634 if (sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) == 1)
7635 return 1;
7636 return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1);
7638 case IOR:
7639 case XOR:
7641 rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0);
7642 rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1);
7643 if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG || sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) <= 0)
7644 return 0;
7645 if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
7646 return INTVAL (op1) >= 0;
7647 return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1);
7649 case LSHIFTRT:
7650 return GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode;
7651 /* Positive integers leave the high bits zero. */
7652 case CONST_DOUBLE:
7653 return ! (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000);
7654 case CONST_INT:
7655 return ! (INTVAL (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000);
7656 case ASHIFTRT:
7657 case SIGN_EXTEND:
7658 return - (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode);
7659 case REG:
7660 return sparc_check_64 (SET_SRC (pat), insn);
7661 default:
7662 return 0;
7666 /* We _ought_ to have only one kind per function, but... */
7667 static GTY(()) rtx sparc_addr_diff_list;
7668 static GTY(()) rtx sparc_addr_list;
7670 void
7671 sparc_defer_case_vector (rtx lab, rtx vec, int diff)
7673 vec = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, lab, vec);
7674 if (diff)
7675 sparc_addr_diff_list
7676 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_diff_list);
7677 else
7678 sparc_addr_list = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_list);
7681 static void
7682 sparc_output_addr_vec (rtx vec)
7684 rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1);
7685 int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 0);
7687 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START
7688 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file);
7689 #endif
7691 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
7692 ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab),
7693 NEXT_INSN (lab));
7694 #else
7695 (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab));
7696 #endif
7698 for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++)
7700 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
7701 (asm_out_file, CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 0, idx), 0)));
7704 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END
7705 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file);
7706 #endif
7709 static void
7710 sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (rtx vec)
7712 rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1);
7713 rtx base = XEXP (XEXP (body, 0), 0);
7714 int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 1);
7716 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START
7717 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file);
7718 #endif
7720 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
7721 ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab),
7722 NEXT_INSN (lab));
7723 #else
7724 (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab));
7725 #endif
7727 for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++)
7729 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
7730 (asm_out_file,
7731 body,
7732 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 1, idx), 0)),
7733 CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (base));
7736 #ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END
7737 ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file);
7738 #endif
7741 static void
7742 sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors (void)
7744 rtx t;
7745 int align;
7747 if (sparc_addr_list == NULL_RTX
7748 && sparc_addr_diff_list == NULL_RTX)
7749 return;
7751 /* Align to cache line in the function's code section. */
7752 function_section (current_function_decl);
7754 align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
7755 if (align > 0)
7756 ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align);
7758 for (t = sparc_addr_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1))
7759 sparc_output_addr_vec (XEXP (t, 0));
7760 for (t = sparc_addr_diff_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1))
7761 sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (XEXP (t, 0));
7763 sparc_addr_list = sparc_addr_diff_list = NULL_RTX;
7766 /* Return 0 if the high 32 bits of X (the low word of X, if DImode) are
7767 unknown. Return 1 if the high bits are zero, -1 if the register is
7768 sign extended. */
7770 sparc_check_64 (rtx x, rtx insn)
7772 /* If a register is set only once it is safe to ignore insns this
7773 code does not know how to handle. The loop will either recognize
7774 the single set and return the correct value or fail to recognize
7775 it and return 0. */
7776 int set_once = 0;
7777 rtx y = x;
7779 if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
7780 abort ();
7782 if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
7783 y = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (x) + WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN);
7785 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7786 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (y)) == 1)
7787 set_once = 1;
7789 if (insn == 0)
7791 if (set_once)
7792 insn = get_last_insn_anywhere ();
7793 else
7794 return 0;
7797 while ((insn = PREV_INSN (insn)))
7799 switch (GET_CODE (insn))
7801 case JUMP_INSN:
7802 case NOTE:
7803 break;
7804 case CODE_LABEL:
7805 case CALL_INSN:
7806 default:
7807 if (! set_once)
7808 return 0;
7809 break;
7810 case INSN:
7812 rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
7813 if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET)
7814 return 0;
7815 if (rtx_equal_p (x, SET_DEST (pat)))
7816 return set_extends (insn);
7817 if (y && rtx_equal_p (y, SET_DEST (pat)))
7818 return set_extends (insn);
7819 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (pat), y))
7820 return 0;
7824 return 0;
7827 /* Returns assembly code to perform a DImode shift using
7828 a 64-bit global or out register on SPARC-V8+. */
7829 char *
7830 sparc_v8plus_shift (rtx *operands, rtx insn, const char *opcode)
7832 static char asm_code[60];
7834 /* The scratch register is only required when the destination
7835 register is not a 64-bit global or out register. */
7836 if (which_alternative != 2)
7837 operands[3] = operands[0];
7839 /* We can only shift by constants <= 63. */
7840 if (GET_CODE (operands[2]) == CONST_INT)
7841 operands[2] = GEN_INT (INTVAL (operands[2]) & 0x3f);
7843 if (GET_CODE (operands[1]) == CONST_INT)
7845 output_asm_insn ("mov\t%1, %3", operands);
7847 else
7849 output_asm_insn ("sllx\t%H1, 32, %3", operands);
7850 if (sparc_check_64 (operands[1], insn) <= 0)
7851 output_asm_insn ("srl\t%L1, 0, %L1", operands);
7852 output_asm_insn ("or\t%L1, %3, %3", operands);
7855 strcpy(asm_code, opcode);
7857 if (which_alternative != 2)
7858 return strcat (asm_code, "\t%0, %2, %L0\n\tsrlx\t%L0, 32, %H0");
7859 else
7860 return strcat (asm_code, "\t%3, %2, %3\n\tsrlx\t%3, 32, %H0\n\tmov\t%3, %L0");
7863 /* Output rtl to increment the profiler label LABELNO
7864 for profiling a function entry. */
7866 void
7867 sparc_profile_hook (int labelno)
7869 char buf[32];
7870 rtx lab, fun;
7872 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (buf, "LP", labelno);
7873 lab = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, ggc_strdup (buf));
7874 fun = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, MCOUNT_FUNCTION);
7876 emit_library_call (fun, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, lab, Pmode);
7879 #ifdef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
7880 static void
7881 sparc_elf_asm_named_section (const char *name, unsigned int flags)
7883 if (flags & SECTION_MERGE)
7885 /* entsize cannot be expressed in this section attributes
7886 encoding style. */
7887 default_elf_asm_named_section (name, flags);
7888 return;
7891 fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t.section\t\"%s\"", name);
7893 if (!(flags & SECTION_DEBUG))
7894 fputs (",#alloc", asm_out_file);
7895 if (flags & SECTION_WRITE)
7896 fputs (",#write", asm_out_file);
7897 if (flags & SECTION_TLS)
7898 fputs (",#tls", asm_out_file);
7899 if (flags & SECTION_CODE)
7900 fputs (",#execinstr", asm_out_file);
7902 /* ??? Handle SECTION_BSS. */
7904 fputc ('\n', asm_out_file);
7906 #endif /* OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF */
7908 /* We do not allow indirect calls to be optimized into sibling calls.
7910 Also, on SPARC 32-bit we cannot emit a sibling call when the
7911 current function returns a structure. This is because the "unimp
7912 after call" convention would cause the callee to return to the
7913 wrong place. The generic code already disallows cases where the
7914 function being called returns a structure.
7916 It may seem strange how this last case could occur. Usually there
7917 is code after the call which jumps to epilogue code which dumps the
7918 return value into the struct return area. That ought to invalidate
7919 the sibling call right? Well, in the c++ case we can end up passing
7920 the pointer to the struct return area to a constructor (which returns
7921 void) and then nothing else happens. Such a sibling call would look
7922 valid without the added check here. */
7923 static bool
7924 sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall (tree decl, tree exp ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
7926 return (decl && (TARGET_ARCH64 || ! current_function_returns_struct));
7929 /* libfunc renaming. */
7930 #include "config/gofast.h"
7932 static void
7933 sparc_init_libfuncs (void)
7935 if (TARGET_ARCH32)
7937 /* Use the subroutines that Sun's library provides for integer
7938 multiply and divide. The `*' prevents an underscore from
7939 being prepended by the compiler. .umul is a little faster
7940 than .mul. */
7941 set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, SImode, "*.umul");
7942 set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, SImode, "*.div");
7943 set_optab_libfunc (udiv_optab, SImode, "*.udiv");
7944 set_optab_libfunc (smod_optab, SImode, "*.rem");
7945 set_optab_libfunc (umod_optab, SImode, "*.urem");
7947 /* TFmode arithmetic. These names are part of the SPARC 32bit ABI. */
7948 set_optab_libfunc (add_optab, TFmode, "_Q_add");
7949 set_optab_libfunc (sub_optab, TFmode, "_Q_sub");
7950 set_optab_libfunc (neg_optab, TFmode, "_Q_neg");
7951 set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, TFmode, "_Q_mul");
7952 set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, TFmode, "_Q_div");
7954 /* We can define the TFmode sqrt optab only if TARGET_FPU. This
7955 is because with soft-float, the SFmode and DFmode sqrt
7956 instructions will be absent, and the compiler will notice and
7957 try to use the TFmode sqrt instruction for calls to the
7958 builtin function sqrt, but this fails. */
7959 if (TARGET_FPU)
7960 set_optab_libfunc (sqrt_optab, TFmode, "_Q_sqrt");
7962 set_optab_libfunc (eq_optab, TFmode, "_Q_feq");
7963 set_optab_libfunc (ne_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fne");
7964 set_optab_libfunc (gt_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fgt");
7965 set_optab_libfunc (ge_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fge");
7966 set_optab_libfunc (lt_optab, TFmode, "_Q_flt");
7967 set_optab_libfunc (le_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fle");
7969 set_conv_libfunc (sext_optab, TFmode, SFmode, "_Q_stoq");
7970 set_conv_libfunc (sext_optab, TFmode, DFmode, "_Q_dtoq");
7971 set_conv_libfunc (trunc_optab, SFmode, TFmode, "_Q_qtos");
7972 set_conv_libfunc (trunc_optab, DFmode, TFmode, "_Q_qtod");
7974 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, SImode, TFmode, "_Q_qtoi");
7975 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, SImode, TFmode, "_Q_qtou");
7976 set_conv_libfunc (sfloat_optab, TFmode, SImode, "_Q_itoq");
7978 if (SUN_CONVERSION_LIBFUNCS)
7980 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftoll");
7981 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftoull");
7982 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtoll");
7983 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtoull");
7986 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
7988 /* In the SPARC 64bit ABI, SImode multiply and divide functions
7989 do not exist in the library. Make sure the compiler does not
7990 emit calls to them by accident. (It should always use the
7991 hardware instructions.) */
7992 set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, SImode, 0);
7993 set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, SImode, 0);
7994 set_optab_libfunc (udiv_optab, SImode, 0);
7995 set_optab_libfunc (smod_optab, SImode, 0);
7996 set_optab_libfunc (umod_optab, SImode, 0);
7998 if (SUN_INTEGER_MULTIPLY_64)
8000 set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, DImode, "__mul64");
8001 set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, DImode, "__div64");
8002 set_optab_libfunc (udiv_optab, DImode, "__udiv64");
8003 set_optab_libfunc (smod_optab, DImode, "__rem64");
8004 set_optab_libfunc (umod_optab, DImode, "__urem64");
8007 if (SUN_CONVERSION_LIBFUNCS)
8009 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftol");
8010 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftoul");
8011 set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtol");
8012 set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtoul");
8016 gofast_maybe_init_libfuncs ();
8019 /* ??? Similar to the standard section selection, but force reloc-y-ness
8020 if SUNOS4_SHARED_LIBRARIES. Unclear why this helps (as opposed to
8021 pretending PIC always on), but that's what the old code did. */
8023 static void
8024 sparc_aout_select_section (tree t, int reloc, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT align)
8026 default_select_section (t, reloc | SUNOS4_SHARED_LIBRARIES, align);
8029 /* Use text section for a constant unless we need more alignment than
8030 that offers. */
8032 static void
8033 sparc_aout_select_rtx_section (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x,
8034 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT align)
8036 if (align <= MAX_TEXT_ALIGN
8037 && ! (flag_pic && (symbolic_operand (x, mode)
8038 || SUNOS4_SHARED_LIBRARIES)))
8039 readonly_data_section ();
8040 else
8041 data_section ();
8045 sparc_extra_constraint_check (rtx op, int c, int strict)
8047 int reload_ok_mem;
8049 if (TARGET_ARCH64
8050 && (c == 'T' || c == 'U'))
8051 return 0;
8053 switch (c)
8055 case 'Q':
8056 return fp_sethi_p (op);
8058 case 'R':
8059 return fp_mov_p (op);
8061 case 'S':
8062 return fp_high_losum_p (op);
8064 case 'U':
8065 if (! strict
8066 || (GET_CODE (op) == REG
8067 && (REGNO (op) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8068 || reg_renumber[REGNO (op)] >= 0)))
8069 return register_ok_for_ldd (op);
8071 return 0;
8073 case 'W':
8074 case 'T':
8075 break;
8077 default:
8078 return 0;
8081 /* Our memory extra constraints have to emulate the
8082 behavior of 'm' and 'o' in order for reload to work
8083 correctly. */
8084 if (GET_CODE (op) == MEM)
8086 reload_ok_mem = 0;
8087 if ((TARGET_ARCH64 || mem_min_alignment (op, 8))
8088 && (! strict
8089 || strict_memory_address_p (Pmode, XEXP (op, 0))))
8090 reload_ok_mem = 1;
8092 else
8094 reload_ok_mem = (reload_in_progress
8095 && GET_CODE (op) == REG
8096 && REGNO (op) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
8097 && reg_renumber [REGNO (op)] < 0);
8100 return reload_ok_mem;
8103 /* ??? This duplicates information provided to the compiler by the
8104 ??? scheduler description. Some day, teach genautomata to output
8105 ??? the latencies and then CSE will just use that. */
8107 static bool
8108 sparc_rtx_costs (rtx x, int code, int outer_code, int *total)
8110 switch (code)
8112 case PLUS: case MINUS: case ABS: case NEG:
8113 case FLOAT: case UNSIGNED_FLOAT:
8114 case FIX: case UNSIGNED_FIX:
8115 case FLOAT_EXTEND: case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
8116 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8118 switch (sparc_cpu)
8120 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8121 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8122 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (4);
8123 return true;
8125 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8126 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8127 return true;
8129 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8130 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
8131 return true;
8133 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8134 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8135 default:
8136 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8137 return true;
8141 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8142 return true;
8144 case SQRT:
8145 switch (sparc_cpu)
8147 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8148 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8149 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (13);
8150 else
8151 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (23);
8152 return true;
8154 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8155 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8156 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (20);
8157 else
8158 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (29);
8159 return true;
8161 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8162 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (12);
8163 return true;
8165 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8166 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (63);
8167 return true;
8169 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8170 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8171 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (17);
8172 return true;
8174 default:
8175 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (30);
8176 return true;
8179 case COMPARE:
8180 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8182 switch (sparc_cpu)
8184 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8185 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8186 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8187 return true;
8189 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8190 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8191 return true;
8193 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8194 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
8195 return true;
8197 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8198 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8199 default:
8200 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8201 return true;
8205 /* ??? Maybe mark integer compares as zero cost on
8206 ??? all UltraSPARC processors because the result
8207 ??? can be bypassed to a branch in the same group. */
8209 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8210 return true;
8212 case MULT:
8213 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8215 switch (sparc_cpu)
8217 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8218 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8219 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (4);
8220 return true;
8222 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8223 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8224 return true;
8226 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8227 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
8228 return true;
8230 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8231 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8232 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8233 return true;
8235 default:
8236 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
8237 return true;
8241 /* The latency is actually variable for Ultra-I/II
8242 And if one of the inputs have a known constant
8243 value, we could calculate this precisely.
8245 However, for that to be useful we would need to
8246 add some machine description changes which would
8247 make sure small constants ended up in rs1 of the
8248 multiply instruction. This is because the multiply
8249 latency is determined by the number of clear (or
8250 set if the value is negative) bits starting from
8251 the most significant bit of the first input.
8253 The algorithm for computing num_cycles of a multiply
8254 on Ultra-I/II is:
8256 if (rs1 < 0)
8257 highest_bit = highest_clear_bit(rs1);
8258 else
8259 highest_bit = highest_set_bit(rs1);
8260 if (num_bits < 3)
8261 highest_bit = 3;
8262 num_cycles = 4 + ((highest_bit - 3) / 2);
8264 If we did that we would have to also consider register
8265 allocation issues that would result from forcing such
8266 a value into a register.
8268 There are other similar tricks we could play if we
8269 knew, for example, that one input was an array index.
8271 Since we do not play any such tricks currently the
8272 safest thing to do is report the worst case latency. */
8273 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
8275 *total = (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
8276 ? COSTS_N_INSNS (34) : COSTS_N_INSNS (19));
8277 return true;
8280 /* Multiply latency on Ultra-III, fortunately, is constant. */
8281 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
8283 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (6);
8284 return true;
8287 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC
8288 || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X)
8290 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (17);
8291 return true;
8294 *total = (TARGET_HARD_MUL ? COSTS_N_INSNS (5) : COSTS_N_INSNS (25));
8295 return true;
8297 case DIV:
8298 case UDIV:
8299 case MOD:
8300 case UMOD:
8301 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8303 switch (sparc_cpu)
8305 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8306 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8307 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (13);
8308 else
8309 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (23);
8310 return true;
8312 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8313 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8314 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (17);
8315 else
8316 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (20);
8317 return true;
8319 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8320 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8321 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (6);
8322 else
8323 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (9);
8324 return true;
8326 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8327 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8328 if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
8329 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (8);
8330 else
8331 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (12);
8332 return true;
8334 default:
8335 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
8336 return true;
8340 if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
8341 *total = (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
8342 ? COSTS_N_INSNS (68) : COSTS_N_INSNS (37));
8343 else if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
8344 *total = (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
8345 ? COSTS_N_INSNS (71) : COSTS_N_INSNS (40));
8346 else
8347 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (25);
8348 return true;
8350 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
8351 /* Conditional moves. */
8352 switch (sparc_cpu)
8354 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8355 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8356 return true;
8358 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8359 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8360 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8361 else
8362 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8363 return true;
8365 default:
8366 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8367 return true;
8370 case MEM:
8371 /* If outer-code is SIGN/ZERO extension we have to subtract
8372 out COSTS_N_INSNS (1) from whatever we return in determining
8373 the cost. */
8374 switch (sparc_cpu)
8376 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
8377 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND)
8378 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8379 else
8380 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8381 return true;
8383 case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
8384 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND)
8386 if (GET_MODE (x) == QImode
8387 || GET_MODE (x) == HImode
8388 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8389 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8390 else
8391 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8393 else
8395 /* This handles sign extension (3 cycles)
8396 and everything else (2 cycles). */
8397 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8399 return true;
8401 case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
8402 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
8403 || outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
8404 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8405 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (0);
8406 else
8407 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8408 return true;
8410 case PROCESSOR_TSC701:
8411 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
8412 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8413 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8414 else
8415 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
8416 return true;
8418 case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
8419 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
8420 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8421 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8422 else
8423 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
8424 return true;
8426 case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
8427 case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
8428 default:
8429 if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
8430 || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
8431 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (0);
8432 else
8433 *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
8434 return true;
8437 case CONST_INT:
8438 if (INTVAL (x) < 0x1000 && INTVAL (x) >= -0x1000)
8440 *total = 0;
8441 return true;
8443 /* Fall through. */
8445 case HIGH:
8446 *total = 2;
8447 return true;
8449 case CONST:
8450 case LABEL_REF:
8451 case SYMBOL_REF:
8452 *total = 4;
8453 return true;
8455 case CONST_DOUBLE:
8456 if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
8457 && ((XINT (x, 3) == 0
8458 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) XINT (x, 2) < 0x1000)
8459 || (XINT (x, 3) == -1
8460 && XINT (x, 2) < 0
8461 && XINT (x, 2) >= -0x1000)))
8462 *total = 0;
8463 else
8464 *total = 8;
8465 return true;
8467 default:
8468 return false;
8472 /* Output code to add DELTA to the first argument, and then jump to FUNCTION.
8473 Used for C++ multiple inheritance. */
8475 static void
8476 sparc_output_mi_thunk (FILE *file, tree thunk_fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
8477 HOST_WIDE_INT delta,
8478 HOST_WIDE_INT vcall_offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
8479 tree function)
8481 rtx this, insn, funexp, delta_rtx, tmp;
8483 reload_completed = 1;
8484 epilogue_completed = 1;
8485 no_new_pseudos = 1;
8486 current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs = 1;
8488 emit_note (NOTE_INSN_PROLOGUE_END);
8490 /* Find the "this" pointer. Normally in %o0, but in ARCH64 if the function
8491 returns a structure, the structure return pointer is there instead. */
8492 if (TARGET_ARCH64 && aggregate_value_p (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (function)), function))
8493 this = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST + 1);
8494 else
8495 this = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
8497 /* Add DELTA. When possible use a plain add, otherwise load it into
8498 a register first. */
8499 delta_rtx = GEN_INT (delta);
8500 if (!SPARC_SIMM13_P (delta))
8502 rtx scratch = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1);
8504 if (input_operand (delta_rtx, GET_MODE (scratch)))
8505 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, scratch, delta_rtx));
8506 else
8508 if (TARGET_ARCH64)
8509 sparc_emit_set_const64 (scratch, delta_rtx);
8510 else
8511 sparc_emit_set_const32 (scratch, delta_rtx);
8514 delta_rtx = scratch;
8517 tmp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, this, delta_rtx);
8518 emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, this, tmp));
8520 /* Generate a tail call to the target function. */
8521 if (! TREE_USED (function))
8523 assemble_external (function);
8524 TREE_USED (function) = 1;
8526 funexp = XEXP (DECL_RTL (function), 0);
8527 funexp = gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE, funexp);
8528 insn = emit_call_insn (gen_sibcall (funexp));
8529 SIBLING_CALL_P (insn) = 1;
8530 emit_barrier ();
8532 /* Run just enough of rest_of_compilation to get the insns emitted.
8533 There's not really enough bulk here to make other passes such as
8534 instruction scheduling worth while. Note that use_thunk calls
8535 assemble_start_function and assemble_end_function. */
8536 insn = get_insns ();
8537 insn_locators_initialize ();
8538 shorten_branches (insn);
8539 final_start_function (insn, file, 1);
8540 final (insn, file, 1, 0);
8541 final_end_function ();
8543 reload_completed = 0;
8544 epilogue_completed = 0;
8545 no_new_pseudos = 0;
8548 /* How to allocate a 'struct machine_function'. */
8550 static struct machine_function *
8551 sparc_init_machine_status (void)
8553 return ggc_alloc_cleared (sizeof (struct machine_function));
8556 /* Locate some local-dynamic symbol still in use by this function
8557 so that we can print its name in local-dynamic base patterns. */
8559 static const char *
8560 get_some_local_dynamic_name (void)
8562 rtx insn;
8564 if (cfun->machine->some_ld_name)
8565 return cfun->machine->some_ld_name;
8567 for (insn = get_insns (); insn ; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
8568 if (INSN_P (insn)
8569 && for_each_rtx (&PATTERN (insn), get_some_local_dynamic_name_1, 0))
8570 return cfun->machine->some_ld_name;
8572 abort ();
8575 static int
8576 get_some_local_dynamic_name_1 (rtx *px, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
8578 rtx x = *px;
8580 if (x
8581 && GET_CODE (x) == SYMBOL_REF
8582 && SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (x) == TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC)
8584 cfun->machine->some_ld_name = XSTR (x, 0);
8585 return 1;
8588 return 0;
8591 /* This is called from dwarf2out.c via ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL.
8592 We need to emit DTP-relative relocations. */
8594 void
8595 sparc_output_dwarf_dtprel (FILE *file, int size, rtx x)
8597 switch (size)
8599 case 4:
8600 fputs ("\t.word\t%r_tls_dtpoff32(", file);
8601 break;
8602 case 8:
8603 fputs ("\t.xword\t%r_tls_dtpoff64(", file);
8604 break;
8605 default:
8606 abort ();
8608 output_addr_const (file, x);
8609 fputs (")", file);
8612 #include "gt-sparc.h"